janishutz/dotfiles
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Actions Packages Projects Releases Activity
dotfiles/config/ags/quickactions/@girs/gcrui-3.d.ts
Janis Hutz b5ad7e3034 [Notes] Some changes
2025-04-25 06:53:17 +02:00

16903 lines
854 KiB
TypeScript
Raw Blame History

This file contains ambiguous Unicode characters

This file contains Unicode characters that might be confused with other characters. If you think that this is intentional, you can safely ignore this warning. Use the Escape button to reveal them.

/// <reference path="./gtk-3.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./xlib-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gdk-3.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./cairo-1.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./cairo.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gobject-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./glib-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./pango-1.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./harfbuzz-0.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./freetype2-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gio-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gmodule-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gdkpixbuf-2.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./atk-1.0.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gcr-3.d.ts" />
/// <reference path="./gck-1.d.ts" />
/**
* Type Definitions for Gjs (https://gjs.guide/)
*
* These type definitions are automatically generated, do not edit them by hand.
* If you found a bug fix it in `ts-for-gir` or create a bug report on https://github.com/gjsify/ts-for-gir
*
* The based EJS template file is used for the generated .d.ts file of each GIR module like Gtk-4.0, GObject-2.0, ...
*/
declare module 'gi://GcrUi?version=3' {
// Module dependencies
import type Gtk from 'gi://Gtk?version=3.0';
import type xlib from 'gi://xlib?version=2.0';
import type Gdk from 'gi://Gdk?version=3.0';
import type cairo from 'cairo';
import type GObject from 'gi://GObject?version=2.0';
import type GLib from 'gi://GLib?version=2.0';
import type Pango from 'gi://Pango?version=1.0';
import type HarfBuzz from 'gi://HarfBuzz?version=0.0';
import type freetype2 from 'gi://freetype2?version=2.0';
import type Gio from 'gi://Gio?version=2.0';
import type GModule from 'gi://GModule?version=2.0';
import type GdkPixbuf from 'gi://GdkPixbuf?version=2.0';
import type Atk from 'gi://Atk?version=1.0';
import type Gcr from 'gi://Gcr?version=3';
import type Gck from 'gi://Gck?version=1';
export namespace GcrUi {
/**
* GcrUi-3
*/
/**
* If a [class`CollectionModel]` is created with a mode of
* %GCR_COLLECTION_MODEL_TREE, then any included objects that are themselves a
* [iface`Gcr`.Collection], will have all child
* objects include as child rows in a tree form.
*/
/**
* If a [class`CollectionModel]` is created with a mode of
* %GCR_COLLECTION_MODEL_TREE, then any included objects that are themselves a
* [iface`Gcr`.Collection], will have all child
* objects include as child rows in a tree form.
*/
export namespace CollectionModelMode {
export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CollectionModelMode>;
}
enum CollectionModelMode {
/**
* only objects in the top collection, no child objects
*/
LIST,
/**
* show objects in the collection, and child objects in a tree form
*/
TREE,
}
/**
* Create and initialize a renderer for the given attributes and label. These
* renderers should have been preregistered via gcr_renderer_register().
* @param label The label for the renderer
* @param attrs The attributes to render
* @returns a new renderer, or %NULL if no renderer matched the attributes; the render should be released with g_object_unref()
*/
function renderer_create(label: string | null, attrs: Gck.Attributes): Renderer | null;
/**
* Register a renderer to be created when matching attributes are passed to
* gcr_renderer_create().
* @param renderer_type The renderer class type
* @param attrs The attributes to match
*/
function renderer_register(renderer_type: GObject.GType, attrs: Gck.Attributes): void;
/**
* Register all the well known renderers for certificates and keys known to the
* Gcr library.
*/
function renderer_register_well_known(): void;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a view
* of multiple renderers.
* @returns a newly allocated #GcrViewer, which should be released with g_object_unref()
*/
function viewer_new(): Viewer;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a scrolled view
* of multiple renderers.
* @returns a #GcrViewer which is also a #GtkWidget
*/
function viewer_new_scrolled(): Viewer;
namespace CertificateRenderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps,
Gcr.Certificate.ConstructorProps,
Gcr.Comparable.ConstructorProps,
Renderer.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
certificate: Gcr.Certificate;
label: string;
}
}
/**
* An implementation of #GcrRenderer which renders certificates.
*/
class CertificateRenderer extends GObject.Object implements Gcr.Certificate, Gcr.Comparable, Renderer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<CertificateRenderer>;
// Properties
/**
* The certificate attributes to display. One of the attributes must be
* a CKA_VALUE type attribute which contains a DER encoded certificate.
*/
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
/**
* The certificate to display. May be %NULL.
*/
get certificate(): Gcr.Certificate;
set certificate(val: Gcr.Certificate);
/**
* The label to display.
*/
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<CertificateRenderer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](certificate: Gcr.Certificate): CertificateRenderer;
static new_for_attributes(label?: string | null, attrs?: any | null): CertificateRenderer;
// Methods
/**
* Get the certificate displayed in the renderer. If no certificate was
* explicitly set, then the renderer will return itself since it acts as
* a valid certificate.
* @returns The certificate, owned by the renderer.
*/
get_certificate(): Gcr.Certificate;
/**
* Set a certificate to display in the renderer.
* @param certificate the certificate to display
*/
set_certificate(certificate?: Gcr.Certificate | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* A readable description for this certificate
*/
get description(): string;
/**
* The expiry date of the certificate
*/
get expiry(): GLib.Date;
/**
* An icon representing the certificate
*/
get icon(): Gio.Icon;
/**
* Common name part of the certificate issuer
*/
get issuer(): string;
/**
* GLib markup to describe the certificate
*/
get markup(): string;
/**
* Common name part of the certificate subject
*/
get subject(): string;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Get the basic constraints for the certificate if present. If %FALSE is
* returned then no basic constraints are present and the `is_ca` and
* `path_len` arguments are not changed.
* @returns whether basic constraints are present or not
*/
get_basic_constraints(): [boolean, boolean, number];
/**
* Gets the raw DER data for an X.509 certificate.
* @returns raw DER data of the X.509 certificate
*/
get_der_data(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Get the expiry date of this certificate.
*
* The #GDate returned should be freed by the caller using
* g_date_free() when no longer required.
* @returns An allocated expiry date of this certificate.
*/
get_expiry_date(): GLib.Date;
/**
* Calculate the fingerprint for this certificate.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @param type the type of algorithm for the fingerprint.
* @returns the raw binary fingerprint
*/
get_fingerprint(type: GLib.ChecksumType | null): Uint8Array;
/**
* Calculate the fingerprint for this certificate, and return it
* as a hex string.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @param type the type of algorithm for the fingerprint.
* @returns an allocated hex string which contains the fingerprint.
*/
get_fingerprint_hex(type: GLib.ChecksumType | null): string;
/**
* Get the issued date of this certificate.
*
* The #GDate returned should be freed by the caller using
* g_date_free() when no longer required.
* @returns An allocated issued date of this certificate.
*/
get_issued_date(): GLib.Date;
/**
* Get the common name of the issuer of this certificate.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated issuer CN, or %NULL if no issuer CN present.
*/
get_issuer_cn(): string;
/**
* Get the full issuer DN of the certificate as a (mostly)
* readable string.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated issuer DN of the certificate.
*/
get_issuer_dn(): string;
/**
* Get a name to represent the issuer of this certificate.
*
* This will try to lookup the common name, orianizational unit,
* organization in that order.
* @returns the allocated issuer name, or %NULL if no issuer name
*/
get_issuer_name(): string;
/**
* Get a part of the DN of the issuer of this certificate.
*
* Examples of a `part` might be the 'OU' (organizational unit)
* or the 'CN' (common name). Only the value of that part
* of the DN is returned.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @param part a DN type string or OID.
* @returns the allocated part of the issuer DN, or %NULL if no such part is present
*/
get_issuer_part(part: string): string | null;
/**
* Get the raw DER data for the issuer DN of the certificate.
*
* The data should be freed by using g_free() when no longer required.
* @returns allocated memory containing the raw issuer
*/
get_issuer_raw(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Get the key size in bits of the public key represented
* by this certificate.
* @returns The key size of the certificate.
*/
get_key_size(): number;
/**
* Calculate a GMarkup string for displaying this certificate.
* @returns the markup string
*/
get_markup_text(): string;
/**
* Get the raw binary serial number of the certificate.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @returns the raw binary serial number.
*/
get_serial_number(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Get the serial number of the certificate as a hex string.
*
* The caller should free the returned data using g_free() when
* it is no longer required.
* @returns an allocated string containing the serial number as hex.
*/
get_serial_number_hex(): string;
/**
* Get the common name of the subject of this certificate.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated subject CN, or %NULL if no subject CN present.
*/
get_subject_cn(): string;
/**
* Get the full subject DN of the certificate as a (mostly)
* readable string.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @returns The allocated subject DN of the certificate.
*/
get_subject_dn(): string;
/**
* Get a name to represent the subject of this certificate.
*
* This will try to lookup the common name, orianizational unit,
* organization in that order.
* @returns the allocated subject name, or %NULL if no subject name
*/
get_subject_name(): string;
/**
* Get a part of the DN of the subject of this certificate.
*
* Examples of a `part` might be the 'OU' (organizational unit)
* or the 'CN' (common name). Only the value of that part
* of the DN is returned.
*
* The string returned should be freed by the caller when no longer
* required.
* @param part a DN type string or OID.
* @returns the allocated part of the subject DN, or %NULL if no such part is present.
*/
get_subject_part(part: string): string | null;
/**
* Get the raw DER data for the subject DN of the certificate.
*
* The data should be freed by using g_free() when no longer required.
* @returns allocated memory containing the raw subject
*/
get_subject_raw(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Check if `issuer` could be the issuer of this certificate. This is done by
* comparing the relevant subject and issuer fields. No signature check is
* done. Proper verification of certificates must be done via a crypto
* library.
* @param issuer a possible issuer #GcrCertificate
* @returns whether @issuer could be the issuer of the certificate.
*/
is_issuer(issuer: Gcr.Certificate): boolean;
/**
* Implementers of the #GcrCertificate mixin should call this function to notify
* when the certificate has changed to emit notifications on the various
* properties.
*/
mixin_emit_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets the raw DER data for an X.509 certificate.
*/
vfunc_get_der_data(): Uint8Array;
/**
* Compare whether two objects represent the same thing. The return value can
* also be used to sort the objects.
* @param other Another comparable object
* @returns Zero if the two objects represent the same thing, non-zero if not.
*/
compare(other?: Gcr.Comparable | null): number;
/**
* Compare whether two objects represent the same thing. The return value can
* also be used to sort the objects.
* @param other Another comparable object
*/
vfunc_compare(other?: Gcr.Comparable | null): number;
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Get the PKCS#11 attributes, if any, set for this renderer to display.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Set the PKCS#11 attributes for this renderer to display.
* @param attrs attributes to set
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace CertificateWidget {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Bin.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
certificate: Gcr.Certificate;
}
}
/**
* A widget that can be used to display a certificate.
*
* A certificate widget is normally in a collapsed state showing only
* details, but can be expanded by the user.
*
* Use [ctor`CertificateWidget`.new] to create a new certificate widget. Only
* one certificate can be displayed. It contains a [iface`Viewer]` internally
* and [class`CertificateRenderer]` is used to render the certificate to the
* viewer.
*
* To show more than one certificate in a view, create the viewer and
* add renderers to it.
*/
class CertificateWidget extends Gtk.Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<CertificateWidget>;
// Properties
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
get certificate(): Gcr.Certificate;
set certificate(val: Gcr.Certificate);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<CertificateWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](certificate?: Gcr.Certificate | null): CertificateWidget;
// Methods
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the widget. The attributes should contain
* a certificate.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the widget
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Get the certificate displayed in the widget.
* @returns the certificate
*/
get_certificate(): Gcr.Certificate | null;
/**
* Set the attributes displayed in the widget. The attributes should contain
* a certificate.
* @param attrs the attributes to display
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
/**
* Set the certificate displayed in the widget
* @param certificate the certificate to display
*/
set_certificate(certificate?: Gcr.Certificate | null): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace CollectionModel {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.TreeModel.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.TreeSortable.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
columns: any;
}
}
/**
* Ain implementation of a [iface`Gtk`.TreeModel] which contains a row for each
* object in a [iface`Gcr`.Collection].
*
* As objects are added or removed from the collection, rows are added and
* removed from this model.
*
* The row values come from the properties of the objects in the collection. Use
* [ctor`CollectionModel`.new] to create a new collection model. To have more
* control over the values use a set of [struct`Gcr`.Column] structures to
* define the columns. This can be done with [ctor`CollectionModel`.new_full] or
* [method`CollectionModel`.set_columns].
*
* Each row can have a selected state, which is represented by a boolean column.
* The selected state can be toggled with gcr_collection_model_toggle_selected()
* or set with gcr_collection_model_set_selected_objects() and retrieved with
* [method`CollectionModel`.get_selected_objects].
*
* To determine which object a row represents and vice versa, use the
* [method`CollectionModel`.iter_for_object] or
* [method`CollectionModel`.object_for_iter] functions.
*/
class CollectionModel extends GObject.Object implements Gtk.TreeModel, Gtk.TreeSortable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<CollectionModel>;
// Properties
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
set collection(val: Gcr.Collection);
get columns(): any;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<CollectionModel.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
// Methods
/**
* Set whether a given row is toggled selected or not.
* @param iter The row
* @param selected Whether the row should be selected or not.
*/
change_selected(iter: Gtk.TreeIter, selected: boolean): void;
/**
* Get the column identifier for the column that contains the values
* of the selected state.
* @returns The column identifier.
*/
column_for_selected(): number;
/**
* Get the collection which this model represents
* @returns the collection, owned by the model
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get a list of checked/selected objects.
* @returns a list of selected objects, which should be freed with g_list_free()
*/
get_selected_objects(): GObject.Object[];
/**
* Check whether a given row has been toggled as selected.
* @param iter The row
* @returns Whether the row has been selected.
*/
is_selected(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Set `iter` to the row for the given object. If the object is not in this
* model, then %FALSE will be returned.
* @param object The object
* @param iter The row for the object
* @returns %TRUE if the object was present.
*/
iter_for_object(object: GObject.Object, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Get the object that is represented by the given row in the model.
* @param iter The row
* @returns The object, owned by the model.
*/
object_for_iter<T = GObject.Object>(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): T;
/**
* Set the collection which this model represents
* @param collection the collection or %NULL
*/
set_collection(collection?: Gcr.Collection | null): void;
/**
* Set the checked/selected objects.
* @param selected a list of objects to select
*/
set_selected_objects(selected: GObject.Object[]): void;
/**
* Toggle the selected state of a given row.
* @param iter The row
*/
toggle_selected(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with `child_model` as the child_model
* and `root` as the virtual root.
* @param root A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
* @returns A new #GtkTreeModel.
*/
filter_new(root?: Gtk.TreePath | null): Gtk.TreeModel;
/**
* Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
*
* If `func` returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked,
* and gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
* @param func a function to be called on each row
*/
foreach(func: Gtk.TreeModelForeachFunc): void;
/**
* Returns the type of the column.
* @param index_ the column index
* @returns the type of the column
*/
get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;
/**
* Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
*
* The flags are a bitwise combination of #GtkTreeModelFlags.
* The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
* of the `tree_model`.
* @returns the flags supported by this interface
*/
get_flags(): Gtk.TreeModelFlags;
/**
* Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`. If `path` does
* not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* @param path the #GtkTreePath-struct
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter was set
*/
get_iter(path: Gtk.TreePath): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
* (the one at the path "0") and returns %TRUE. Returns
* %FALSE if the tree is empty.
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter was set
*/
get_iter_first(): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string,` if it
* exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
* @param path_string a string representation of a #GtkTreePath-struct
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter was set
*/
get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
* @returns the number of columns
*/
get_n_columns(): number;
/**
* Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct referenced by `iter`.
*
* This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct
*/
get_path(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): Gtk.TreePath;
/**
* Generates a string representation of the iter.
*
* This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
* For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
* return value for this string.
* @param iter a #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns a newly-allocated string. Must be freed with g_free().
*/
get_string_from_iter(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): string;
/**
* Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
*
* When done with `value,` g_value_unset() needs to be called
* to free any allocated memory.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @param column the column to lookup the value at
*/
get_value(iter: Gtk.TreeIter, column: number): unknown;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
*
* If `parent` has no children, %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
* function has been called.
*
* If `parent` is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
* `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter has been set to the first child
*/
iter_children(parent?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `iter` has children, %FALSE otherwise.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct to test for children
* @returns %TRUE if @iter has children
*/
iter_has_child(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
*
* As a special case, if `iter` is %NULL, then the number
* of toplevel nodes is returned.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
* @returns the number of children of @iter
*/
iter_n_children(iter?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): number;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
*
* If there is no next `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is set
* to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the next node
*/
iter_next(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent,` using the given index.
*
* The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. `parent`
* will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
* special case, if `parent` is %NULL, then the `n-th` root node
* is set.
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct to get the child from, or %NULL.
* @param n the index of the desired child
* @returns %TRUE, if @parent has an @n-th child
*/
iter_nth_child(parent: Gtk.TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
*
* If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
* called.
*
* `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
* and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
* @param child the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns %TRUE, if @iter is set to the parent of @child
*/
iter_parent(child: Gtk.TreeIter): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
*
* If there is no previous `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @returns %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the previous node
*/
iter_previous(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Lets the tree ref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons.
*
* This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
* caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
* whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
* is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
* visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
* would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
* just the sections that are currently being displayed by
* every current view.
*
* A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
* of its reffed state.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
ref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-changed signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
row_changed(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-deleted signal on `tree_model`.
*
* This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
* The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
* the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
*
* Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
* outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the previous location of the deleted row
*/
row_deleted(path: Gtk.TreePath): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-has-child-toggled signal on
* `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
* state of a node changes.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
row_has_child_toggled(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-inserted signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the inserted row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the inserted row
*/
row_inserted(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::rows-reordered signal on `tree_model`.
*
* This should be called by models when their rows have been
* reordered.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the tree node whose children have been reordered
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the node whose children have been reordered, or %NULL if the depth of @path is 0
* @param new_order an array of integers mapping the current position of each child to its old position before the re-ordering, i.e. @new_order`[newpos] = oldpos`
*/
rows_reordered(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;
/**
* Lets the tree unref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
* this means, see gtk_tree_model_ref_node().
*
* Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
unref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Returns the type of the column.
* @param index_ the column index
*/
vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;
/**
* Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
*
* The flags are a bitwise combination of #GtkTreeModelFlags.
* The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
* of the `tree_model`.
*/
vfunc_get_flags(): Gtk.TreeModelFlags;
/**
* Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`. If `path` does
* not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* @param path the #GtkTreePath-struct
*/
vfunc_get_iter(path: Gtk.TreePath): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
*/
vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;
/**
* Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct referenced by `iter`.
*
* This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_get_path(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): Gtk.TreePath;
/**
* Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
*
* When done with `value,` g_value_unset() needs to be called
* to free any allocated memory.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
* @param column the column to lookup the value at
*/
vfunc_get_value(iter: Gtk.TreeIter, column: number): unknown;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
*
* If `parent` has no children, %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
* function has been called.
*
* If `parent` is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
* `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_iter_children(parent?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `iter` has children, %FALSE otherwise.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct to test for children
*/
vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
*
* As a special case, if `iter` is %NULL, then the number
* of toplevel nodes is returned.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_iter_n_children(iter?: Gtk.TreeIter | null): number;
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
*
* If there is no next `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is set
* to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_iter_next(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent,` using the given index.
*
* The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. `parent`
* will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
* special case, if `parent` is %NULL, then the `n-th` root node
* is set.
* @param parent the #GtkTreeIter-struct to get the child from, or %NULL.
* @param n the index of the desired child
*/
vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: Gtk.TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
*
* If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
* `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
* `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
* called.
*
* `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
* and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
* @param child the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_iter_parent(child: Gtk.TreeIter): [boolean, Gtk.TreeIter];
/**
* Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
*
* If there is no previous `iter,` %FALSE is returned and `iter` is
* set to be invalid.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_iter_previous(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): boolean;
/**
* Lets the tree ref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons.
*
* This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
* caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
* whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
* is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
* visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
* would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
* just the sections that are currently being displayed by
* every current view.
*
* A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
* of its reffed state.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_ref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-changed signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
vfunc_row_changed(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-deleted signal on `tree_model`.
*
* This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
* The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
* the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
*
* Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
* outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the previous location of the deleted row
*/
vfunc_row_deleted(path: Gtk.TreePath): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-has-child-toggled signal on
* `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
* state of a node changes.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the changed row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the changed row
*/
vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkTreeModel::row-inserted signal on `tree_model`.
* @param path a #GtkTreePath-struct pointing to the inserted row
* @param iter a valid #GtkTreeIter-struct pointing to the inserted row
*/
vfunc_row_inserted(path: Gtk.TreePath, iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Lets the tree unref the node.
*
* This is an optional method for models to implement.
* To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
* primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
* this means, see gtk_tree_model_ref_node().
*
* Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
* @param iter the #GtkTreeIter-struct
*/
vfunc_unref_node(iter: Gtk.TreeIter): void;
/**
* Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
* order. It returns %TRUE unless the `sort_column_id` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.
* @returns %TRUE if the sort column is not one of the special sort column ids.
*/
get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, Gtk.SortType];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
* primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
* go back to the default state, or not.
* @returns %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
*/
has_default_sort_func(): boolean;
/**
* Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
* If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the model will sort using
* this function.
*
* If `sort_func` is %NULL, then there will be no default comparison function.
* This means that once the model has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
* default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
* is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
set_default_sort_func(sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc, destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null): void;
/**
* Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
* resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
* #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
* a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID: the default sort function
* will be used, if it is set
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID: no sorting will occur
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
* @param order The sort order of the column
*/
set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: Gtk.SortType | null): void;
/**
* Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
* current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id,` then
* the model will sort using this function.
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
set_sort_func(
sort_column_id: number,
sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc,
destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): void;
/**
* Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on `sortable`.
*/
sort_column_changed(): void;
/**
* Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
* order. It returns %TRUE unless the `sort_column_id` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.
*/
vfunc_get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, Gtk.SortType];
/**
* Returns %TRUE if the model has a default sort function. This is used
* primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
* go back to the default state, or not.
*/
vfunc_has_default_sort_func(): boolean;
/**
* Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
* If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
* %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the model will sort using
* this function.
*
* If `sort_func` is %NULL, then there will be no default comparison function.
* This means that once the model has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
* default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
* is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_default_sort_func(sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc, destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null): void;
/**
* Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
* resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
* #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
* a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID: the default sort function
* will be used, if it is set
*
* - %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID: no sorting will occur
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
* @param order The sort order of the column
*/
vfunc_set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: Gtk.SortType): void;
/**
* Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
* current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id,` then
* the model will sort using this function.
* @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
* @param sort_func The comparison function
* @param destroy Destroy notifier of @user_data, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_sort_func(
sort_column_id: number,
sort_func: Gtk.TreeIterCompareFunc,
destroy?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): void;
/**
* Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on `sortable`.
*/
vfunc_sort_column_changed(): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ComboSelector {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.ComboBox.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.CellEditable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
}
}
/**
* A widget that can be used to select a certificate or key. It allows
* the user to select one object from the selector at a time.
*/
class ComboSelector
extends Gtk.ComboBox
implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.CellEditable, Gtk.CellLayout
{
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboSelector>;
// Properties
/**
* The collection which contains the objects to display in the selector.
*/
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<ComboSelector.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](collection: Gcr.Collection): ComboSelector;
// Conflicted with Gtk.ComboBox.new
static ['new'](...args: never[]): any;
// Methods
/**
* Get the collection that this selector is displaying objects from.
* @returns The collection, owned by the selector.
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get the selected object in the selector, or %NULL if nothing selected.
* @returns the selected object, owned by the selector, or %NULL
*/
get_selected<T = GObject.Object>(): T;
/**
* Set the currently selected object in the selector, or clear the selection
* if selected is set to %NULL.
* @param selected the object to select or %NULL
*/
set_selected(selected?: GObject.Object | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
*/
get editing_canceled(): boolean;
set editing_canceled(val: boolean);
/**
* Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
*/
get editingCanceled(): boolean;
set editingCanceled(val: boolean);
get app_paintable(): boolean;
set app_paintable(val: boolean);
get appPaintable(): boolean;
set appPaintable(val: boolean);
get can_default(): boolean;
set can_default(val: boolean);
get canDefault(): boolean;
set canDefault(val: boolean);
get can_focus(): boolean;
set can_focus(val: boolean);
get canFocus(): boolean;
set canFocus(val: boolean);
get composite_child(): boolean;
get compositeChild(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get double_buffered(): boolean;
set double_buffered(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get doubleBuffered(): boolean;
set doubleBuffered(val: boolean);
get events(): Gdk.EventMask;
set events(val: Gdk.EventMask);
/**
* Whether to expand in both directions. Setting this sets both #GtkWidget:hexpand and #GtkWidget:vexpand
*/
get expand(): boolean;
set expand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focus_on_click(): boolean;
set focus_on_click(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focusOnClick(): boolean;
set focusOnClick(val: boolean);
/**
* How to distribute horizontal space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get halign(): Gtk.Align;
set halign(val: Gtk.Align);
get has_default(): boolean;
set has_default(val: boolean);
get hasDefault(): boolean;
set hasDefault(val: boolean);
get has_focus(): boolean;
set has_focus(val: boolean);
get hasFocus(): boolean;
set hasFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get has_tooltip(): boolean;
set has_tooltip(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get hasTooltip(): boolean;
set hasTooltip(val: boolean);
get height_request(): number;
set height_request(val: number);
get heightRequest(): number;
set heightRequest(val: number);
/**
* Whether to expand horizontally. See gtk_widget_set_hexpand().
*/
get hexpand(): boolean;
set hexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpand_set(): boolean;
set hexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpandSet(): boolean;
set hexpandSet(val: boolean);
get is_focus(): boolean;
set is_focus(val: boolean);
get isFocus(): boolean;
set isFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Sets all four sides' margin at once. If read, returns max
* margin on any side.
*/
get margin(): number;
set margin(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_bottom(): number;
set margin_bottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginBottom(): number;
set marginBottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_end(): number;
set margin_end(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginEnd(): number;
set marginEnd(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_left(): number;
set margin_left(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginLeft(): number;
set marginLeft(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_right(): number;
set margin_right(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginRight(): number;
set marginRight(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_start(): number;
set margin_start(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginStart(): number;
set marginStart(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_top(): number;
set margin_top(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginTop(): number;
set marginTop(val: number);
get name(): string;
set name(val: string);
get no_show_all(): boolean;
set no_show_all(val: boolean);
get noShowAll(): boolean;
set noShowAll(val: boolean);
/**
* The requested opacity of the widget. See gtk_widget_set_opacity() for
* more details about window opacity.
*
* Before 3.8 this was only available in GtkWindow
*/
get opacity(): number;
set opacity(val: number);
get parent(): Gtk.Container;
set parent(val: Gtk.Container);
get receives_default(): boolean;
set receives_default(val: boolean);
get receivesDefault(): boolean;
set receivesDefault(val: boolean);
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scale_factor(): number;
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scaleFactor(): number;
get sensitive(): boolean;
set sensitive(val: boolean);
/**
* The style of the widget, which contains information about how it will look (colors, etc).
*/
get style(): Gtk.Style;
set style(val: Gtk.Style);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_markup(): string;
set tooltip_markup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipMarkup(): string;
set tooltipMarkup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_text(): string;
set tooltip_text(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipText(): string;
set tooltipText(val: string);
/**
* How to distribute vertical space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get valign(): Gtk.Align;
set valign(val: Gtk.Align);
/**
* Whether to expand vertically. See gtk_widget_set_vexpand().
*/
get vexpand(): boolean;
set vexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpand_set(): boolean;
set vexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpandSet(): boolean;
set vexpandSet(val: boolean);
get visible(): boolean;
set visible(val: boolean);
get width_request(): number;
set width_request(val: number);
get widthRequest(): number;
set widthRequest(val: number);
/**
* The widget's window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
*/
get window(): Gdk.Window;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
*/
editing_done(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
*/
remove_widget(): void;
/**
* Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
*
* The #GtkCellRenderer for the cell creates and returns a #GtkCellEditable from
* gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing(), configured for the #GtkCellRenderer type.
*
* gtk_cell_editable_start_editing() can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
* editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit #GtkCellEditable::editing-done.
*
* Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
* lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
* @param event The #GdkEvent that began the editing process, or %NULL if editing was initiated programmatically
*/
start_editing(event?: Gdk.Event | null): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
*/
vfunc_editing_done(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
*/
vfunc_remove_widget(): void;
/**
* Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
*
* The #GtkCellRenderer for the cell creates and returns a #GtkCellEditable from
* gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing(), configured for the #GtkCellRenderer type.
*
* gtk_cell_editable_start_editing() can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
* editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit #GtkCellEditable::editing-done.
*
* Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
* lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
* @param event The #GdkEvent that began the editing process, or %NULL if editing was initiated programmatically
*/
vfunc_start_editing(event?: Gdk.Event | null): void;
/**
* Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
*
* The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
* `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
* example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
* “text” attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from column 2.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
* @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
*/
add_attribute(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;
/**
* Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
* removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
*/
clear(): void;
/**
* Clears all existing attributes previously set with
* gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on
*/
clear_attributes(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer): void;
/**
* Returns the underlying #GtkCellArea which might be `cell_layout`
* if called on a #GtkCellArea or might be %NULL if no #GtkCellArea
* is used by `cell_layout`.
* @returns the cell area used by @cell_layout, or %NULL in case no cell area is used.
*/
get_area(): Gtk.CellArea | null;
/**
* Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
* @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has been newly allocated and should be freed with g_list_free() when no longer needed.
*/
get_cells(): Gtk.CellRenderer[];
/**
* Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE, then the
* `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
* divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
pack_end(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE,
* then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
* is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
pack_start(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
*
* Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
* for this to function properly.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to reorder
* @param position new position to insert @cell at
*/
reorder(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, position: number): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use for `cell_layout`.
*
* This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
* for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout’`s
* cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
*
* `func` may be %NULL to remove a previously set function.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param func the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use, or %NULL
*/
set_cell_data_func(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, func?: Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
/**
* Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
*
* The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
* `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
* example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
* “text” attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from column 2.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
* @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
*/
vfunc_add_attribute(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;
/**
* Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
* removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
*/
vfunc_clear(): void;
/**
* Clears all existing attributes previously set with
* gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on
*/
vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer): void;
/**
* Returns the underlying #GtkCellArea which might be `cell_layout`
* if called on a #GtkCellArea or might be %NULL if no #GtkCellArea
* is used by `cell_layout`.
*/
vfunc_get_area(): Gtk.CellArea | null;
/**
* Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
*/
vfunc_get_cells(): Gtk.CellRenderer[];
/**
* Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE, then the
* `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
* divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
vfunc_pack_end(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is %FALSE,
* then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
* is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is %TRUE.
*
* Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param expand %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout
*/
vfunc_pack_start(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
*
* Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
* for this to function properly.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer to reorder
* @param position new position to insert @cell at
*/
vfunc_reorder(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, position: number): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use for `cell_layout`.
*
* This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
* for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout’`s
* cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
*
* `func` may be %NULL to remove a previously set function.
* @param cell a #GtkCellRenderer
* @param func the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: Gtk.CellRenderer, func?: Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
/**
* For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
* this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
* press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
* activatable, the function returns %FALSE.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget was activatable
*/
activate(): boolean;
/**
* Installs an accelerator for this `widget` in `accel_group` that causes
* `accel_signal` to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
* The `accel_group` needs to be added to the widget’s toplevel via
* gtk_window_add_accel_group(), and the signal must be of type %G_SIGNAL_ACTION.
* Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
* runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
* user, use gtk_accel_map_add_entry() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path() or
* gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() instead.
* @param accel_signal widget signal to emit on accelerator activation
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget, added to its toplevel
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @param accel_flags flag accelerators, e.g. %GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE
*/
add_accelerator(
accel_signal: string,
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
accel_flags: Gtk.AccelFlags | null,
): void;
/**
* Adds the device events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_device_events() for details.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Adds the events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_events() and the
* [input handling overview][event-masks] for details.
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
* list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
* widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
* its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
* to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
* @param label a #GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for @widget
*/
add_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Queues an animation frame update and adds a callback to be called
* before each frame. Until the tick callback is removed, it will be
* called frequently (usually at the frame rate of the output device
* or as quickly as the application can be repainted, whichever is
* slower). For this reason, is most suitable for handling graphics
* that change every frame or every few frames. The tick callback does
* not automatically imply a relayout or repaint. If you want a
* repaint or relayout, and aren’t changing widget properties that
* would trigger that (for example, changing the text of a #GtkLabel),
* then you will have to call gtk_widget_queue_resize() or
* gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() yourself.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() should generally be used for timing
* continuous animations and
* gdk_frame_timings_get_predicted_presentation_time() if you are
* trying to display isolated frames at particular times.
*
* This is a more convenient alternative to connecting directly to the
* #GdkFrameClock::update signal of #GdkFrameClock, since you don't
* have to worry about when a #GdkFrameClock is assigned to a widget.
* @param callback function to call for updating animations
* @returns an id for the connection of this callback. Remove the callback by passing it to gtk_widget_remove_tick_callback()
*/
add_tick_callback(callback: Gtk.TickCallback): number;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
* @returns %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
*/
can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
* writing an app, you’d use gtk_widget_grab_focus() to move the focus
* to a particular widget, and gtk_container_set_focus_chain() to
* change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those
* functions instead.
*
* gtk_widget_child_focus() is called by containers as the user moves
* around the window using keyboard shortcuts. `direction` indicates
* what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab
* forward, tab backward). gtk_widget_child_focus() emits the
* #GtkWidget::focus signal; widgets override the default handler
* for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.
*
* The default ::focus handler for a widget should return %TRUE if
* moving in `direction` left the focus on a focusable location inside
* that widget, and %FALSE if moving in `direction` moved the focus
* outside the widget. If returning %TRUE, widgets normally
* call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
* if returning %FALSE, they don’t modify the current focus location.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if focus ended up inside @widget
*/
child_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
child_notify(child_property: string): void;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget’s type,
* never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
*/
class_path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this widget extra space
* when possible. Containers should check this, rather than
* looking at gtk_widget_get_hexpand() or gtk_widget_get_vexpand().
*
* This function already checks whether the widget is visible, so
* visibility does not need to be checked separately. Non-visible
* widgets are not expanded.
*
* The computed expand value uses either the expand setting explicitly
* set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set,
* the widget may expand if some of its children do.
* @param orientation expand direction
* @returns whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
*/
compute_expand(orientation: Gtk.Orientation | null): boolean;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoContext with the appropriate font map,
* font options, font description, and base direction for drawing
* text for this widget. See also gtk_widget_get_pango_context().
* @returns the new #PangoContext
*/
create_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
* font description, and base direction for drawing text for
* this widget.
*
* If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, you need
* to re-create it when the widget #PangoContext is replaced.
* This can be tracked by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal
* on the widget.
* @param text text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
* @returns the new #PangoLayout
*/
create_pango_layout(text?: string | null): Pango.Layout;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
destroy(): void;
/**
* This function sets *`widget_pointer` to %NULL if `widget_pointer` !=
* %NULL. It’s intended to be used as a callback connected to the
* “destroy” signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
* as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
* as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
* be set to %NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
* of the same dialog.
* @param widget_pointer address of a variable that contains @widget
*/
destroyed(widget_pointer: Gtk.Widget): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `device` has been shadowed by a GTK+
* device grab on another widget, so it would stop sending
* events to `widget`. This may be used in the
* #GtkWidget::grab-notify signal to check for specific
* devices. See gtk_device_grab_add().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE if there is an ongoing grab on @device by another #GtkWidget than @widget.
*/
device_is_shadowed(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* This function is equivalent to gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates(),
* passing -1, -1 as coordinates.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event?: Gdk.Event | null,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Initiates a drag on the source side. The function only needs to be used
* when the application is starting drags itself, and is not needed when
* gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
*
* The `event` is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
* grab the pointer. If `event` is %NULL, then %GDK_CURRENT_TIME will be used.
* However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
* used to get information about the drag.
*
* Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by
* calling this function:
*
* 1. During a #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* immediately when the user presses the mouse button. Pass the `event`
* that you have in your #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler.
*
* 2. During a #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* when the mouse moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press.
* Pass the `event` that you have in your #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler.
*
* 3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
* button is held down for some time. Try to save the last event that you got
* from the mouse, using gdk_event_copy(), and pass it to this function
* (remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done).
* If you really cannot pass a real event, pass %NULL instead.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @param x The initial x coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @param y The initial y coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin_with_coordinates(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event: Gdk.Event | null,
x: number,
y: number,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (`start_x,` `start_y)` and ending
* at (`current_x,` `current_y)` has passed the GTK+ drag threshold, and thus
* should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
* @param start_x X coordinate of start of drag
* @param start_y Y coordinate of start of drag
* @param current_x current X coordinate
* @param current_y current Y coordinate
* @returns %TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.
*/
drag_check_threshold(start_x: number, start_y: number, current_x: number, current_y: number): boolean;
/**
* Add the image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Looks for a match between the supported targets of `context` and the
* `dest_target_list,` returning the first matching target, otherwise
* returning %GDK_NONE. `dest_target_list` should usually be the return
* value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
* have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
* that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
* passes the correct target list to this function.
* @param context drag context
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
* @returns first target that the source offers and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
*/
drag_dest_find_target(context: Gdk.DragContext, target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): Gdk.Atom;
/**
* Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_dest_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
* emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion signals.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget always emits #GtkWidget::drag-motion events
*/
drag_dest_get_track_motion(): boolean;
/**
* Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
*
* The default behaviors listed in `flags` have an effect similar
* to installing default handlers for the widget’s drag-and-drop signals
* (#GtkWidget::drag-motion, #GtkWidget::drag-drop, ...). They all exist
* for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
* sufficient to connect to the widget’s #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
* signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
*
* Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
* as described in the documentation for #GtkWidget::drag-motion. The default
* behaviors described by `flags` make some assumptions, that can conflict
* with your own signal handlers. For instance #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP causes
* invokations of gdk_drag_status() in the context of #GtkWidget::drag-motion,
* and invokations of gtk_drag_finish() in #GtkWidget::drag-data-received.
* Especially the later is dramatic, when your own #GtkWidget::drag-motion
* handler calls gtk_drag_get_data() to inspect the dragged data.
*
* There’s no way to set a default action here, you can use the
* #GtkWidget::drag-motion callback for that. Here’s an example which selects
* the action to use depending on whether the control key is pressed or not:
*
* ```c
* static void
* drag_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
* GdkDragContext *context,
* gint x,
* gint y,
* guint time)
* {
* GdkModifierType mask;
*
* gdk_window_get_pointer (gtk_widget_get_window (widget),
* NULL, NULL, &mask);
* if (mask & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_COPY, time);
* else
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
* }
* ```
*
* @param flags which types of default drag behavior to use
* @param targets a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntrys indicating the drop types that this @widget will accept, or %NULL. Later you can access the list with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list() and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
* @param actions a bitmask of possible actions for a drop onto this @widget.
*/
drag_dest_set(
flags: Gtk.DestDefaults | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets this widget as a proxy for drops to another window.
* @param proxy_window the window to which to forward drag events
* @param protocol the drag protocol which the @proxy_window accepts (You can use gdk_drag_get_protocol() to determine this)
* @param use_coordinates If %TRUE, send the same coordinates to the destination, because it is an embedded subwindow.
*/
drag_dest_set_proxy(
proxy_window: Gdk.Window,
protocol: Gdk.DragProtocol | null,
use_coordinates: boolean,
): void;
/**
* Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
* gtk_drag_dest_set().
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_dest_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Tells the widget to emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion and
* #GtkWidget::drag-leave events regardless of the targets and the
* %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION flag.
*
* This may be used when a widget wants to do generic
* actions regardless of the targets that the source offers.
* @param track_motion whether to accept all targets
*/
drag_dest_set_track_motion(track_motion: boolean): void;
/**
* Clears information about a drop destination set with
* gtk_drag_dest_set(). The widget will no longer receive
* notification of drags.
*/
drag_dest_unset(): void;
/**
* Gets the data associated with a drag. When the data
* is received or the retrieval fails, GTK+ will emit a
* #GtkWidget::drag-data-received signal. Failure of the retrieval
* is indicated by the length field of the `selection_data`
* signal parameter being negative. However, when gtk_drag_get_data()
* is called implicitely because the %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP was set,
* then the widget will not receive notification of failed
* drops.
* @param context the drag context
* @param target the target (form of the data) to retrieve
* @param time_ a timestamp for retrieving the data. This will generally be the time received in a #GtkWidget::drag-motion or #GtkWidget::drag-drop signal
*/
drag_get_data(context: Gdk.DragContext, target: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): void;
/**
* Highlights a widget as a currently hovered drop target.
* To end the highlight, call gtk_drag_unhighlight().
* GTK+ calls this automatically if %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT is set.
*/
drag_highlight(): void;
/**
* Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_source_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Sets up a widget so that GTK+ will start a drag operation when the user
* clicks and drags on the widget. The widget must have a window.
* @param start_button_mask the bitmask of buttons that can start the drag
* @param targets the table of targets that the drag will support, may be %NULL
* @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget
*/
drag_source_set(
start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to `icon`. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon A #GIcon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a themed icon. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon_name name of icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular widget
* from a #GdkPixbuf. GTK+ retains a reference for `pixbuf` and will
* release it when it is no longer needed.
* @param pixbuf the #GdkPixbuf for the drag icon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a stock icon.
* @param stock_id the ID of the stock icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_stock(stock_id: string): void;
/**
* Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag source with
* gtk_drag_source_set().
* @param target_list list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_source_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Undoes the effects of gtk_drag_source_set().
*/
drag_source_unset(): void;
/**
* Removes a highlight set by gtk_drag_highlight() from
* a widget.
*/
drag_unhighlight(): void;
/**
* Draws `widget` to `cr`. The top left corner of the widget will be
* drawn to the currently set origin point of `cr`.
*
* You should pass a cairo context as `cr` argument that is in an
* original state. Otherwise the resulting drawing is undefined. For
* example changing the operator using cairo_set_operator() or the
* line width using cairo_set_line_width() might have unwanted side
* effects.
* You may however change the context’s transform matrix - like with
* cairo_scale(), cairo_translate() or cairo_set_matrix() and clip
* region with cairo_clip() prior to calling this function. Also, it
* is fine to modify the context with cairo_save() and
* cairo_push_group() prior to calling this function.
*
* Note that special-purpose widgets may contain special code for
* rendering to the screen and might appear differently on screen
* and when rendered using gtk_widget_draw().
* @param cr a cairo context to draw to
*/
draw(cr: cairo.Context): void;
/**
* Ensures that `widget` has a style (`widget->`style).
*
* Not a very useful function; most of the time, if you
* want the style, the widget is realized, and realized
* widgets are guaranteed to have a style already.
*/
ensure_style(): void;
/**
* Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
* If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
* gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
*
* Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
* ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
* or window manager that is used.
*/
error_bell(): void;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget`. The
* signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
*/
freeze_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
* @returns the #AtkObject associated with @widget
*/
get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves the #GActionGroup that was registered using `prefix`. The resulting
* #GActionGroup may have been registered to `widget` or any #GtkWidget in its
* ancestry.
*
* If no action group was found matching `prefix,` then %NULL is returned.
* @param prefix The “prefix” of the action group.
* @returns A #GActionGroup or %NULL.
*/
get_action_group(prefix: string): Gio.ActionGroup | null;
/**
* Returns the baseline that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function, and when allocating child
* widgets in #GtkWidget::size_allocate.
* @returns the baseline of the @widget, or -1 if none
*/
get_allocated_baseline(): number;
/**
* Returns the height that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the height of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_height(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocated size.
*
* This function returns the last values passed to
* gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline(). The value differs from
* the size returned in gtk_widget_get_allocation() in that functions
* like gtk_widget_set_halign() can adjust the allocation, but not
* the value returned by this function.
*
* If a widget is not visible, its allocated size is 0.
*/
get_allocated_size(): [Gtk.Allocation, number];
/**
* Returns the width that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the width of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_width(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocation.
*
* Note, when implementing a #GtkContainer: a widget’s allocation will
* be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent
* container typically calls gtk_widget_size_allocate() with an
* allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin
* and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget.
* gtk_widget_get_allocation() returns the adjusted allocation that
* was actually assigned to the widget. The adjusted allocation is
* guaranteed to be completely contained within the
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() allocation, however. So a #GtkContainer
* is guaranteed that its children stay inside the assigned bounds,
* but not that they have exactly the bounds the container assigned.
* There is no way to get the original allocation assigned by
* gtk_widget_size_allocate(), since it isn’t stored; if a container
* implementation needs that information it will have to track it itself.
*/
get_allocation(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Gets the first ancestor of `widget` with type `widget_type`. For example,
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)` gets
* the first #GtkBox that’s an ancestor of `widget`. No reference will be
* added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
* about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
*
* Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
* considers `widget` to be an ancestor of itself.
* @param widget_type ancestor type
* @returns the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
*/
get_ancestor(widget_type: GObject.GType): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
*/
get_app_paintable(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_default(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_focus(): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
* `widget->`requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
* geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_size_request()),
* in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
* requisition.
*
* This function differs from gtk_widget_size_request() in that
* it retrieves the last size request value from `widget->`requisition,
* while gtk_widget_size_request() actually calls the "size_request" method
* on `widget` to compute the size request and fill in `widget->`requisition,
* and only then returns `widget->`requisition.
*
* Because this function does not call the “size_request” method, it
* can only be used when you know that `widget->`requisition is
* up-to-date, that is, gtk_widget_size_request() has been called
* since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
* implementations have this information; applications should use
* gtk_widget_size_request().
*/
get_child_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
* If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
* needs reorganization.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
*/
get_child_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s clip area.
*
* The clip area is the area in which all of `widget'`s drawing will
* happen. Other toolkits call it the bounding box.
*
* Historically, in GTK+ the clip area has been equal to the allocation
* retrieved via gtk_widget_get_allocation().
*/
get_clip(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
* be used with `widget`. `widget` must have a #GdkDisplay
* associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
* window.
* @param selection a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the default clipboard. Another common value is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives the primary X selection.
* @returns the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard object has been created, it is persistent for all time.
*/
get_clipboard(selection: Gdk.Atom): Gtk.Clipboard;
/**
* Obtains the composite name of a widget.
* @returns the composite name of @widget, or %NULL if @widget is not a composite child. The string should be freed when it is no longer needed.
*/
get_composite_name(): string;
/**
* Returns whether `device` can interact with `widget` and its
* children. See gtk_widget_set_device_enabled().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE is @device is enabled for @widget
*/
get_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
* are the events that the widget will receive when `device` operates on it.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns device event mask for @widget
*/
get_device_events(device: Gdk.Device): Gdk.EventMask;
/**
* Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_direction().
* @returns the reading direction for the widget.
*/
get_direction(): Gtk.TextDirection;
/**
* Get the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create display specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_display(): Gdk.Display;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
*/
get_double_buffered(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for the widget. These are the
* events that the widget will receive.
*
* Note: Internally, the widget event mask will be the logical OR of the event
* mask set through gtk_widget_set_events() or gtk_widget_add_events(), and the
* event mask necessary to cater for every #GtkEventController created for the
* widget.
* @returns event mask for @widget
*/
get_events(): number;
/**
* Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* See gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*/
get_focus_on_click(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the font map that has been set with gtk_widget_set_font_map().
* @returns A #PangoFontMap, or %NULL
*/
get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;
/**
* Returns the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering. When not set,
* the defaults font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @returns the #cairo_font_options_t or %NULL if not set
*/
get_font_options(): cairo.FontOptions | null;
/**
* Obtains the frame clock for a widget. The frame clock is a global
* “ticker” that can be used to drive animations and repaints. The
* most common reason to get the frame clock is to call
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), in order to get a time to use for
* animating. For example you might record the start of the animation
* with an initial value from gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), and
* then update the animation by calling
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() again during each repaint.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_request_phase() will result in a new frame on the
* clock, but won’t necessarily repaint any widgets. To repaint a
* widget, you have to use gtk_widget_queue_draw() which invalidates
* the widget (thus scheduling it to receive a draw on the next
* frame). gtk_widget_queue_draw() will also end up requesting a frame
* on the appropriate frame clock.
*
* A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is
* mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can
* change the widget’s frame clock.
*
* Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
* @returns a #GdkFrameClock, or %NULL if widget is unrealized
*/
get_frame_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock | null;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:halign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. Baselines are not supported for horizontal
* alignment.
* @returns the horizontal alignment of @widget
*/
get_halign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @returns current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
*/
get_has_tooltip(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
* gtk_widget_set_has_window().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_has_window(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Containers should use gtk_widget_compute_expand() rather than
* this function, to see whether a widget, or any of its children,
* has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to
* expand, the parent may ask to expand also.
*
* This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather
* than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
* wants to expand.
* @returns whether hexpand flag is set
*/
get_hexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_hexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @returns whether hexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_hexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is mapped.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
get_mapped(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @returns The bottom margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_bottom(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @returns The end margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_end(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @returns The left margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_left(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @returns The right margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_right(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @returns The start margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_start(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @returns The top margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_top(): number;
/**
* Returns the modifier mask the `widget’`s windowing system backend
* uses for a particular purpose.
*
* See gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask().
* @param intent the use case for the modifier mask
* @returns the modifier mask used for @intent.
*/
get_modifier_mask(intent: Gdk.ModifierIntent | null): Gdk.ModifierType;
/**
* Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
* gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
* #GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
* modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
* style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
* returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
*
* Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
* normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
* the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
* thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
* to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
* @returns the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
*/
get_modifier_style(): Gtk.RcStyle;
/**
* Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
* significance of widget names.
* @returns name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
*/
get_name(): string;
/**
* Returns the current value of the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
* which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all()
* will affect this widget.
* @returns the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
*/
get_no_show_all(): boolean;
/**
* Fetches the requested opacity for this widget.
* See gtk_widget_set_opacity().
* @returns the requested opacity for this widget.
*/
get_opacity(): number;
/**
* Gets a #PangoContext with the appropriate font map, font description,
* and base direction for this widget. Unlike the context returned
* by gtk_widget_create_pango_context(), this context is owned by
* the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
* or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
* match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
* by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal on the widget.
* @returns the #PangoContext for the widget.
*/
get_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Returns the parent container of `widget`.
* @returns the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
*/
get_parent(): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Gets `widget’`s parent window, or %NULL if it does not have one.
* @returns the parent window of @widget, or %NULL if it does not have a parent window.
*/
get_parent_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWidgetPath representing `widget,` if the widget
* is not connected to a toplevel widget, a partial path will be
* created.
* @returns The #GtkWidgetPath representing @widget
*/
get_path(): Gtk.WidgetPath;
/**
* Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(); and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*/
get_pointer(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking
* into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
*
* This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
* not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used
* to deduce toplevel window and menu sizes as well as child widgets in
* free-form containers such as GtkLayout.
*
* Handle with care. Note that the natural height of a height-for-width
* widget will generally be a smaller size than the minimum height, since the required
* height for the natural width is generally smaller than the required height for
* the minimum width.
*
* Use gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width() if you want to support
* baseline alignment.
*/
get_preferred_size(): [Gtk.Requisition | null, Gtk.Requisition | null];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is realized.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_realized(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is always treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget acts as the default widget when focused, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_receives_default(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
* @returns The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @widget.
*/
get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s requisition.
*
* This function should only be used by widget implementations in
* order to figure whether the widget’s requisition has actually
* changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
* gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
*
* Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
*/
get_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
* only be called after the widget has been added to a widget
* hierarchy with #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
* #GdkWindow associated with the window. In general, you should only
* create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
* and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_root_window(): Gdk.Window;
/**
* Retrieves the internal scale factor that maps from window coordinates
* to the actual device pixels. On traditional systems this is 1, on
* high density outputs, it can be a higher value (typically 2).
*
* See gdk_window_get_scale_factor().
* @returns the scale factor for @widget
*/
get_scale_factor(): number;
/**
* Get the #GdkScreen from the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow
* at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create screen specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;
/**
* Returns the widget’s sensitivity (in the sense of returning
* the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()).
*
* The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
* own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
*/
get_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the settings object holding the settings used for this widget.
*
* Note that this function can only be called when the #GtkWidget
* is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific
* to a particular #GdkScreen.
* @returns the relevant #GtkSettings object
*/
get_settings(): Gtk.Settings;
/**
* Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in `width` or
* `height` indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
* and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. See
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
* actually request, call gtk_widget_get_preferred_size() instead of
* this function.
*/
get_size_request(): [number, number];
/**
* Returns the widget’s state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
* @returns the state of @widget.
*/
get_state(): Gtk.StateType;
/**
* Returns the widget state as a flag set. It is worth mentioning
* that the effective %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE state will be
* returned, that is, also based on parent insensitivity, even if
* `widget` itself is sensitive.
*
* Also note that if you are looking for a way to obtain the
* #GtkStateFlags to pass to a #GtkStyleContext method, you
* should look at gtk_style_context_get_state().
* @returns The state flags for widget
*/
get_state_flags(): Gtk.StateFlags;
/**
* Simply an accessor function that returns `widget->`style.
* @returns the widget’s #GtkStyle
*/
get_style(): Gtk.Style;
/**
* Returns the style context associated to `widget`. The returned object is
* guaranteed to be the same for the lifetime of `widget`.
* @returns a #GtkStyleContext. This memory is owned by @widget and must not be freed.
*/
get_style_context(): Gtk.StyleContext;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `widget` is multiple pointer aware. See
* gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice() for more information.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is multidevice aware.
*/
get_support_multidevice(): boolean;
/**
* Fetch an object build from the template XML for `widget_type` in this `widget` instance.
*
* This will only report children which were previously declared with
* gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_full() or one of its
* variants.
*
* This function is only meant to be called for code which is private to the `widget_type` which
* declared the child and is meant for language bindings which cannot easily make use
* of the GObject structure offsets.
* @param widget_type The #GType to get a template child for
* @param name The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
* @returns The object built in the template XML with the id @name
*/
get_template_child<T = GObject.Object>(widget_type: GObject.GType, name: string): T;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_markup(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_text(): string | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWindow of the current tooltip. This can be the
* GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
* using gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window().
* @returns The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
*/
get_tooltip_window(): Gtk.Window;
/**
* This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy
* `widget` is a part of. If `widget` has no parent widgets, it will be
* returned as the topmost widget. No reference will be added to the
* returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.
*
* Note the difference in behavior vs. gtk_widget_get_ancestor();
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)`
* would return
* %NULL if `widget` wasn’t inside a toplevel window, and if the
* window was inside a #GtkWindow-derived widget which was in turn
* inside the toplevel #GtkWindow. While the second case may
* seem unlikely, it actually happens when a #GtkPlug is embedded
* inside a #GtkSocket within the same application.
*
* To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and call GTK_IS_WINDOW()
* on the result. For instance, to get the title of a widget's toplevel
* window, one might use:
*
* ```c
* static const char *
* get_widget_toplevel_title (GtkWidget *widget)
* {
* GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
* if (GTK_IS_WINDOW (toplevel))
* {
* return gtk_window_get_title (GTK_WINDOW (toplevel));
* }
*
* return NULL;
* }
* ```
*
* @returns the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself if there’s no ancestor.
*/
get_toplevel(): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. If your widget want to support baseline aligned
* children it must use gtk_widget_get_valign_with_baseline(), or
* `g_object_get (widget, "valign", &value, NULL)`, which will
* also report the true value.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget, ignoring baseline alignment
*/
get_valign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property, including
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget
*/
get_valign_with_baseline(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand flag is set
*/
get_vexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_vexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_vexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is visible. If you want to
* take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as
* visible, use gtk_widget_is_visible() instead.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_visible().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is visible
*/
get_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the visual that will be used to render `widget`.
* @returns the visual for @widget
*/
get_visual(): Gdk.Visual;
/**
* Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
* @returns @widget’s window.
*/
get_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Makes `widget` the current grabbed widget.
*
* This means that interaction with other widgets in the same
* application is blocked and mouse as well as keyboard events
* are delivered to this widget.
*
* If `widget` is not sensitive, it is not set as the current
* grabbed widget and this function does nothing.
*/
grab_add(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to become the default widget. `widget` must be able to be
* a default widget; typically you would ensure this yourself
* by calling gtk_widget_set_can_default() with a %TRUE value.
* The default widget is activated when
* the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
* activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them. Note
* that #GtkEntry widgets require the “activates-default” property
* set to %TRUE before they activate the default widget when Enter
* is pressed and the #GtkEntry is focused.
*/
grab_default(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Removes the grab from the given widget.
*
* You have to pair calls to gtk_grab_add() and gtk_grab_remove().
*
* If `widget` does not have the grab, this function does nothing.
*/
grab_remove(): void;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
* is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
*
* See also gtk_grab_add().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
*/
has_grab(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
has_rc_style(): boolean;
/**
* Checks whether there is a #GdkScreen is associated with
* this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
* screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
* window at the top.
* @returns %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associated with the widget.
*/
has_screen(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget should show a visible indication that
* it has the global input focus. This is a convenience function for
* use in ::draw handlers that takes into account whether focus
* indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of
* `widget`. See gtk_window_get_focus_visible() for more information
* about focus indication.
*
* To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
* gtk_widget_has_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
*/
has_visible_focus(): boolean;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
hide(): void;
/**
* Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
* signal on a #GtkWindow. The function calls gtk_widget_hide() on its
* argument, then returns %TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the
* result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
* window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
* the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
* is received.
* @returns %TRUE
*/
hide_on_delete(): boolean;
/**
* Returns whether the widget is currently being destroyed.
* This information can sometimes be used to avoid doing
* unnecessary work.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is being destroyed
*/
in_destruction(): boolean;
/**
* Creates and initializes child widgets defined in templates. This
* function must be called in the instance initializer for any
* class which assigned itself a template using gtk_widget_class_set_template()
*
* It is important to call this function in the instance initializer
* of a #GtkWidget subclass and not in #GObject.constructed() or
* #GObject.constructor() for two reasons.
*
* One reason is that generally derived widgets will assume that parent
* class composite widgets have been created in their instance
* initializers.
*
* Another reason is that when calling g_object_new() on a widget with
* composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets
* before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to g_object_new()
* should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML.
*/
init_template(): void;
/**
* Sets an input shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
* gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region() for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
input_shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Inserts `group` into `widget`. Children of `widget` that implement
* #GtkActionable can then be associated with actions in `group` by
* setting their “action-name” to
* `prefix`.`action-name`.
*
* If `group` is %NULL, a previously inserted group for `name` is removed
* from `widget`.
* @param name the prefix for actions in @group
* @param group a #GActionGroup, or %NULL
*/
insert_action_group(name: string, group?: Gio.ActionGroup | null): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `area,` storing
* the intersection in `intersection,` and returns %TRUE if there was
* an intersection. `intersection` may be %NULL if you’re only
* interested in whether there was an intersection.
* @param area a rectangle
* @returns %TRUE if there was an intersection
*/
intersect(area: Gdk.Rectangle): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle | null];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is somewhere inside `ancestor,` possibly with
* intermediate containers.
* @param ancestor another #GtkWidget
* @returns %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child, grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
*/
is_ancestor(ancestor: Gtk.Widget): boolean;
/**
* Whether `widget` can rely on having its alpha channel
* drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
* compositing manager is running for `widget’`s screen.
*
* Please note that the semantics of this call will change
* in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
* window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
* @returns %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha channel being drawn correctly.
*/
is_composited(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
* to if it is mapped and visible.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_drawable(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the widget’s effective sensitivity, which means
* it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
*/
is_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is a toplevel widget.
*
* Currently only #GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible (and out-of-process
* #GtkPlugs) are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent
* widget.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_toplevel(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget and all its parents are marked as
* visible.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See also gtk_widget_get_visible() and gtk_widget_set_visible()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible
*/
is_visible(): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
*/
keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Lists the closures used by `widget` for accelerator group connections
* with gtk_accel_group_connect_by_path() or gtk_accel_group_connect().
* The closures can be used to monitor accelerator changes on `widget,`
* by connecting to the `GtkAccelGroup:`:accel-changed signal of the
* #GtkAccelGroup of a closure which can be found out with
* gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure().
* @returns a newly allocated #GList of closures
*/
list_accel_closures(): GObject.Closure[];
/**
* Retrieves a %NULL-terminated array of strings containing the prefixes of
* #GActionGroup's available to `widget`.
* @returns a %NULL-terminated array of strings.
*/
list_action_prefixes(): string[];
/**
* Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
* which this widget is the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
* gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
*
* The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
* want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
* callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
* must call `g_list_foreach (result,
* (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and then unref all the
* widgets afterwards.
* @returns the list of mnemonic labels; free this list with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
*/
list_mnemonic_labels(): Gtk.Widget[];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
map(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
* @returns %TRUE if the signal has been handled
*/
mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Sets the base color for a widget in a particular state.
* All other style values are left untouched. The base color
* is the background color used along with the text color
* (see gtk_widget_modify_text()) for widgets such as #GtkEntry
* and #GtkTextView. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > base color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the base color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the base color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_base().
*/
modify_base(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > background color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the background color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
*/
modify_bg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the #GtkWidget
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param primary the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
* @param secondary the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
*/
modify_cursor(primary?: Gdk.Color | null, secondary?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the foreground color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the foreground color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
*/
modify_fg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font()
*/
modify_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Modifies style values on the widget.
*
* Modifications made using this technique take precedence over
* style values set via an RC file, however, they will be overridden
* if a style is explicitly set on the widget using gtk_widget_set_style().
* The #GtkRcStyle-struct is designed so each field can either be
* set or unset, so it is possible, using this function, to modify some
* style values and leave the others unchanged.
*
* Note that modifications made with this function are not cumulative
* with previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_style() or with such
* functions as gtk_widget_modify_fg(). If you wish to retain
* previous values, you must first call gtk_widget_get_modifier_style(),
* make your modifications to the returned style, then call
* gtk_widget_modify_style() with that style. On the other hand,
* if you first call gtk_widget_modify_style(), subsequent calls
* to such functions gtk_widget_modify_fg() will have a cumulative
* effect with the initial modifications.
* @param style the #GtkRcStyle-struct holding the style modifications
*/
modify_style(style: Gtk.RcStyle): void;
/**
* Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* The text color is the foreground color used along with the
* base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base()) for widgets such
* as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the text color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_text().
*/
modify_text(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_background_color()
*/
override_background_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
*
* This function does not act recursively. Setting the color of a
* container does not affect its children. Note that some widgets that
* you may not think of as containers, for instance #GtkButtons,
* are actually containers.
*
* This API is mostly meant as a quick way for applications to
* change a widget appearance. If you are developing a widgets
* library and intend this change to be themeable, it is better
* done by setting meaningful CSS classes in your
* widget/container implementation through gtk_style_context_add_class().
*
* This way, your widget library can install a #GtkCssProvider
* with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority in order
* to provide a default styling for those widgets that need so, and
* this theming may fully overridden by the user’s theme.
*
* Note that for complex widgets this may bring in undesired
* results (such as uniform background color everywhere), in
* these cases it is better to fully style such widgets through a
* #GtkCssProvider with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION
* priority.
* @param state the state for which to set the color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_color()
*/
override_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* Note that the underlying properties have the #GdkColor type,
* so the alpha value in `primary` and `secondary` will be ignored.
* @param cursor the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
* @param secondary_cursor the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
*/
override_cursor(cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null, secondary_cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are
* left untouched. See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_font()
*/
override_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color() for overriding the foreground
* or background color.
* @param name the name of the symbolic color to modify
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_symbolic_color()
*/
override_symbolic_color(name: string, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Obtains the full path to `widget`. The path is simply the name of a
* widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by
* periods. The name of a widget comes from
* gtk_widget_get_name(). Paths are used to apply styles to a widget
* in gtkrc configuration files. Widget names are the type of the
* widget by default (e.g. “GtkButton”) or can be set to an
* application-specific value with gtk_widget_set_name(). By setting
* the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
* styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
* file. `path_reversed_p` fills in the path in reverse order,
* i.e. starting with `widget’`s name instead of starting with the name
* of `widget’`s outermost ancestor.
*/
path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
*
* Flags the widget for a rerun of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* function. Use this function instead of gtk_widget_queue_resize()
* when the `widget'`s size request didn't change but it wants to
* reposition its contents.
*
* An example user of this function is gtk_widget_set_halign().
*/
queue_allocate(): void;
/**
* Mark `widget` as needing to recompute its expand flags. Call
* this function when setting legacy expand child properties
* on the child of a container.
*
* See gtk_widget_compute_expand().
*/
queue_compute_expand(): void;
/**
* Equivalent to calling gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() for the
* entire area of a widget.
*/
queue_draw(): void;
/**
* Convenience function that calls gtk_widget_queue_draw_region() on
* the region created from the given coordinates.
*
* The region here is specified in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(), and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*
* `width` or `height` may be 0, in this case this function does
* nothing. Negative values for `width` and `height` are not allowed.
* @param x x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param y y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param width width of region to draw
* @param height height of region to draw
*/
queue_draw_area(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
* be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
* For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
* queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.
*
* Note that you cannot call gtk_widget_queue_resize() on a widget
* from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* virtual method. Calls to gtk_widget_queue_resize() from inside
* GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate will be silently ignored.
*/
queue_resize(): void;
/**
* This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
* except that the widget is not invalidated.
*/
queue_resize_no_redraw(): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
realize(): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `region,` returning
* the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
* check.
* @param region a #cairo_region_t, in the same coordinate system as @widget->allocation. That is, relative to @widget->window for widgets which return %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window(); relative to the parent window of @widget->window otherwise.
* @returns A newly allocated region holding the intersection of @widget and @region.
*/
region_intersect(region: cairo.Region): cairo.Region;
/**
* Registers a #GdkWindow with the widget and sets it up so that
* the widget receives events for it. Call gtk_widget_unregister_window()
* when destroying the window.
*
* Before 3.8 you needed to call gdk_window_set_user_data() directly to set
* this up. This is now deprecated and you should use gtk_widget_register_window()
* instead. Old code will keep working as is, although some new features like
* transparency might not work perfectly.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
register_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Removes an accelerator from `widget,` previously installed with
* gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @returns whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
*/
remove_accelerator(
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
): boolean;
/**
* Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). The widget
* must have previously been added to the list with
* gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
* @param label a #GtkWidget that was previously set as a mnemonic label for @widget with gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
*/
remove_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Removes a tick callback previously registered with
* gtk_widget_add_tick_callback().
* @param id an id returned by gtk_widget_add_tick_callback()
*/
remove_tick_callback(id: number): void;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme settings for `widget`
* to look up `stock_id` and render it to a pixbuf. `stock_id` should
* be a stock icon ID such as #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size`
* should be a size such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. `detail` should be a
* string that identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so
* that theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or
* code.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be
* freed after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @param detail render detail to pass to theme engine
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon(stock_id: string, size: number, detail?: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme engine and style
* settings for `widget` to look up `stock_id` and render it to
* a pixbuf. `stock_id` should be a stock icon ID such as
* #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size` should be a size
* such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
* after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon_pixbuf(stock_id: string, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* Moves a widget from one #GtkContainer to another, handling reference
* count issues to avoid destroying the widget.
* @param new_parent a #GtkContainer to move the widget into
*/
reparent(new_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Reset the styles of `widget` and all descendents, so when
* they are looked up again, they get the correct values
* for the currently loaded RC file settings.
*
* This function is not useful for applications.
*/
reset_rc_styles(): void;
/**
* Updates the style context of `widget` and all descendants
* by updating its widget path. #GtkContainers may want
* to use this on a child when reordering it in a way that a different
* style might apply to it. See also gtk_container_get_path_for_child().
*/
reset_style(): void;
/**
* Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* an expose event on a widget. This function is not normally used
* directly. The only time it is used is when propagating an expose
* event to a windowless child widget (gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE),
* and that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_draw().
*
* If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
* To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
* with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
* @param event a expose #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
send_expose(event: Gdk.Event): number;
/**
* Sends the focus change `event` to `widget`
*
* This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
* should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
* to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
* it’s not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
* window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
*
* An example of its usage is:
*
*
* ```c
* GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
*
* fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
* fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
* fevent->focus_change.window = _gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
* if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
* g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
*
* gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
*
* gdk_event_free (event);
* ```
*
* @param event a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
* @returns the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
*/
send_focus_change(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Given an accelerator group, `accel_group,` and an accelerator path,
* `accel_path,` sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
* key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
* will be activated. This removes any accelerators (for any
* accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
* gtk_widget_set_accel_path(). Associating accelerators with
* paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
* to be saved for future use. (See gtk_accel_map_save().)
*
* This function is a low level function that would most likely
* be used by a menu creation system like #GtkUIManager. If you
* use #GtkUIManager, setting up accelerator paths will be done
* automatically.
*
* Even when you you aren’t using #GtkUIManager, if you only want to
* set up accelerators on menu items gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()
* provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
*
* Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
* pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
* g_intern_static_string().
* @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
* @param accel_group a #GtkAccelGroup.
*/
set_accel_path(accel_path?: string | null, accel_group?: Gtk.AccelGroup | null): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s allocation. This should not be used
* directly, but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
*
* The allocation set should be the “adjusted” or actual
* allocation. If you’re implementing a #GtkContainer, you want to use
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() instead of gtk_widget_set_allocation().
* The GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_allocation virtual method adjusts the
* allocation inside gtk_widget_size_allocate() to create an adjusted
* allocation.
* @param allocation a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_allocation(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of
* the GTK+ core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets
* that do pay attention to the flag, such as #GtkEventBox and #GtkWindow,
* the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
* background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application
* is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background.
*
* Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped.
* @param app_paintable %TRUE if the application will paint on the widget
*/
set_app_paintable(app_paintable: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param can_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_can_default(can_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
* widget.
* @param can_focus whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
*/
set_can_focus(can_focus: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether `widget` should be mapped along with its when its parent
* is mapped and `widget` has been shown with gtk_widget_show().
*
* The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to
* a container with gtk_widget_set_parent(), to avoid mapping
* children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However
* it will be reset to its default state of %TRUE when the widget
* is removed from a container.
*
* Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not
* queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of
* a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or
* not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container
* can queue a resize itself.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @param is_visible if %TRUE, @widget should be mapped along with its parent.
*/
set_child_visible(is_visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s clip. This must not be used directly,
* but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
* It must be called after gtk_widget_set_allocation() (or after chaining up
* to the parent class), because that function resets the clip.
*
* The clip set should be the area that `widget` draws on. If `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, the area must contain all children's clips.
*
* If this function is not called by `widget` during a ::size-allocate handler,
* the clip will be set to `widget'`s allocation.
* @param clip a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_clip(clip: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be
* a composite child of its parent; see gtk_widget_push_composite_child().
* @param name the name to set
*/
set_composite_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Enables or disables a #GdkDevice to interact with `widget`
* and all its children.
*
* It does so by descending through the #GdkWindow hierarchy
* and enabling the same mask that is has for core events
* (i.e. the one that gdk_window_get_events() returns).
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param enabled whether to enable the device
*/
set_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device, enabled: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive from `device`. Keep
* in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with windowless widgets (which return
* %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window());
* to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
* and receive events on the event box.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events event mask
*/
set_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
* controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
* and also the direction in which the children of a container are
* packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
* so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
* reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
* let the default reading direction present, except for containers
* where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly
* visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
*
* If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
* set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
* @param dir the new direction
*/
set_direction(dir: Gtk.TextDirection | null): void;
/**
* Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
* to turn off the buffering. “Double buffered” simply means that
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() are called
* automatically around expose events sent to the
* widget. gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() diverts all drawing to a widget's
* window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() draws the
* buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
* update in one smooth step, and don’t see individual graphics
* primitives being rendered.
*
* In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don’t flicker,
* so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
* if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
*
* Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
* expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
* pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()).
*
* In 3.10 GTK and GDK have been restructured for translucent drawing. Since
* then expose events for double-buffered widgets are culled into a single
* event to the toplevel GDK window. If you now unset double buffering, you
* will cause a separate rendering pass for every widget. This will likely
* cause rendering problems - in particular related to stacking - and usually
* increases rendering times significantly.
* @param double_buffered %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
*/
set_double_buffered(double_buffered: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
* that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with widgets that have no window.
* (See gtk_widget_get_has_window()). To get events on those widgets,
* place them inside a #GtkEventBox and receive events on the event
* box.
* @param events event mask
*/
set_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
* you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
* application.
* @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
*/
set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the font map to use for Pango rendering. When not set, the widget
* will inherit the font map from its parent.
* @param font_map a #PangoFontMap, or %NULL to unset any previously set font map
*/
set_font_map(font_map?: Pango.FontMap | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering in this widget.
* When not set, the default font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @param options a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any previously set default font options.
*/
set_font_options(options?: cairo.FontOptions | null): void;
/**
* Sets the horizontal alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:halign property.
* @param align the horizontal alignment
*/
set_halign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets the has-tooltip property on `widget` to `has_tooltip`. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @param has_tooltip whether or not @widget has a tooltip.
*/
set_has_tooltip(has_tooltip: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
* all realized widgets have a non-%NULL “window” pointer
* (gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
* is realized), but for many of them it’s actually the #GdkWindow of
* one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
* themselves in #GtkWidget::realize must announce this by
* calling this function with `has_window` = %FALSE.
*
* This function should only be called by widget implementations,
* and they should call it in their init() function.
* @param has_window whether or not @widget has a window.
*/
set_has_window(has_window: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Call this function to set the expand flag if you would like your
* widget to become larger horizontally when the window has extra
* room.
*
* By default, widgets automatically expand if any of their children
* want to expand. (To see if a widget will automatically expand given
* its current children and state, call gtk_widget_compute_expand(). A
* container can decide how the expandability of children affects the
* expansion of the container by overriding the compute_expand virtual
* method on #GtkWidget.).
*
* Setting hexpand explicitly with this function will override the
* automatic expand behavior.
*
* This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand,
* regardless of children. The override occurs because
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() sets the hexpand-set property (see
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()) which causes the widget’s hexpand
* value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_hexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the hexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_hexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* The hexpand-set property will be set automatically when you call
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() to set hexpand, so the most likely
* reason to use this function would be to unset an explicit expand
* flag.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @param set value for hexpand-set property
*/
set_hexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being mapped.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “map” or “unmap” implementation.
* @param mapped %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
*/
set_mapped(mapped: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the bottom margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @param margin the bottom margin
*/
set_margin_bottom(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the end margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @param margin the end margin
*/
set_margin_end(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the left margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @param margin the left margin
*/
set_margin_left(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the right margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @param margin the right margin
*/
set_margin_right(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the start margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @param margin the start margin
*/
set_margin_start(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the top margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @param margin the top margin
*/
set_margin_top(margin: number): void;
/**
* Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a
* CSS file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name
* in the CSS file. See the documentation for the CSS syntax (on the
* same page as the docs for #GtkStyleContext).
*
* Note that the CSS syntax has certain special characters to delimit
* and represent elements in a selector (period, #, >, *...), so using
* these will make your widget impossible to match by name. Any combination
* of alphanumeric symbols, dashes and underscores will suffice.
* @param name name for the widget
*/
set_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property, which determines whether
* calls to gtk_widget_show_all() will affect this widget.
*
* This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
* controlled visibility, see #GtkUIManager.
* @param no_show_all the new value for the “no-show-all” property
*/
set_no_show_all(no_show_all: boolean): void;
/**
* Request the `widget` to be rendered partially transparent,
* with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Opacity values
* are clamped to the [0,1] range.).
* This works on both toplevel widget, and child widgets, although there
* are some limitations:
*
* For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
* system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
* running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
* always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
* shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
*
* For child widgets it doesn’t work if any affected widget has a native window, or
* disables double buffering.
* @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
*/
set_opacity(opacity: number): void;
/**
* This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
* #GtkContainer.
* Sets the container as the parent of `widget,` and takes care of
* some details such as updating the state and style of the child
* to reflect its new location. The opposite function is
* gtk_widget_unparent().
* @param parent parent container
*/
set_parent(parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Sets a non default parent window for `widget`.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, setting a `parent_window` effects whether
* the window is a toplevel window or can be embedded into other
* widgets.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, this needs to be called before the
* window is realized.
* @param parent_window the new parent window.
*/
set_parent_window(parent_window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being realized. This function must only be
* called after all #GdkWindows for the `widget` have been created
* and registered.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “realize” or “unrealize” implementation.
* @param realized %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
*/
set_realized(realized: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` will be treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param receives_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_receives_default(receives_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
* allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
* the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
* leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
* setting off will improve performance.
*
* Note that for widgets where gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE
* setting this flag to %FALSE turns off all allocation on resizing:
* the widget will not even redraw if its position changes; this is to
* allow containers that don’t draw anything to avoid excess
* invalidations. If you set this flag on a widget with no window that
* does draw on `widget->`window, you are
* responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation of the
* widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
* regions newly when the widget increases size.
* @param redraw_on_allocate if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
*/
set_redraw_on_allocate(redraw_on_allocate: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
* can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are “grayed out” and the
* user can’t interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
* “inactive”, “disabled”, or “ghosted” in some other toolkits.
* @param sensitive %TRUE to make the widget sensitive
*/
set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget’s size
* request will be at least `width` by `height`. You can use this
* function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.
*
* In most cases, gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for
* toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will
* still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request
* will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size
* request. When dealing with window sizes,
* gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful function as well.
*
* Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
* translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
* can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
* basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
* correct.
*
* The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can
* accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly.
* However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than
* its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more
* space than it requested.
*
* If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then
* the “natural” size request of the widget will be used instead.
*
* The size request set here does not include any margin from the
* #GtkWidget properties margin-left, margin-right, margin-top, and
* margin-bottom, but it does include pretty much all other padding
* or border properties set by any subclass of #GtkWidget.
* @param width width @widget should request, or -1 to unset
* @param height height @widget should request, or -1 to unset
*/
set_size_request(width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
* of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
* the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
* @param state new state for @widget
*/
set_state(state: Gtk.StateType | null): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns on flag
* values in the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
*
* This function accepts the values %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_LTR and
* %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_RTL but ignores them. If you want to set the widget's
* direction, use gtk_widget_set_direction().
*
* It is worth mentioning that any other state than %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE,
* will be propagated down to all non-internal children if `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, while %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE itself will be propagated
* down to all #GtkContainer children by different means than turning on the
* state flag down the hierarchy, both gtk_widget_get_state_flags() and
* gtk_widget_is_sensitive() will make use of these.
* @param flags State flags to turn on
* @param clear Whether to clear state before turning on @flags
*/
set_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null, clear: boolean): void;
/**
* Used to set the #GtkStyle for a widget (`widget->`style). Since
* GTK 3, this function does nothing, the passed in style is ignored.
* @param style a #GtkStyle, or %NULL to remove the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
*/
set_style(style?: Gtk.Style | null): void;
/**
* Enables or disables multiple pointer awareness. If this setting is %TRUE,
* `widget` will start receiving multiple, per device enter/leave events. Note
* that if custom #GdkWindows are created in #GtkWidget::realize,
* gdk_window_set_support_multidevice() will have to be called manually on them.
* @param support_multidevice %TRUE to support input from multiple devices.
*/
set_support_multidevice(support_multidevice: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
* the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
*
* This function will take care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE
* and of the default handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup property and
* gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
* @param markup the contents of the tooltip for @widget, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_markup(markup?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
* care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE and of the default
* handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-text property and gtk_tooltip_set_text().
* @param text the contents of the tooltip for @widget
*/
set_tooltip_text(text?: string | null): void;
/**
* Replaces the default window used for displaying
* tooltips with `custom_window`. GTK+ will take care of showing and
* hiding `custom_window` at the right moment, to behave likewise as
* the default tooltip window. If `custom_window` is %NULL, the default
* tooltip window will be used.
* @param custom_window a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_window(custom_window?: Gtk.Window | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:valign property.
* @param align the vertical alignment
*/
set_valign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand() for more detail.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_vexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the vexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_vexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @param set value for vexpand-set property
*/
set_vexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visibility state of `widget`. Note that setting this to
* %TRUE doesn’t mean the widget is actually viewable, see
* gtk_widget_get_visible().
*
* This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
* but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
* some condition.
* @param visible whether the widget should be shown or not
*/
set_visible(visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visual that should be used for by widget and its children for
* creating #GdkWindows. The visual must be on the same #GdkScreen as
* returned by gtk_widget_get_screen(), so handling the
* #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal is necessary.
*
* Setting a new `visual` will not cause `widget` to recreate its windows,
* so you should call this function before `widget` is realized.
* @param visual visual to be used or %NULL to unset a previous one
*/
set_visual(visual?: Gdk.Visual | null): void;
/**
* Sets a widget’s window. This function should only be used in a
* widget’s #GtkWidget::realize implementation. The %window passed is
* usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
* window of its parent widget as returned by
* gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
*
* Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
* by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
* widget’s init() function.
*
* Note that this function does not add any reference to `window`.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
set_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Sets a shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* transparent windows etc., see gdk_window_shape_combine_region()
* for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
show_all(): void;
/**
* Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget
* (i.e. a #GtkWindow that has not yet been shown), enter the main
* loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful;
* because the main loop is running, anything can happen during
* this function.
*/
show_now(): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size,
* position and (optionally) baseline to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation and baseline may be adjusted. It
* will be forced to a 1x1 minimum size, and the
* adjust_size_allocation virtual and adjust_baseline_allocation
* methods on the child will be used to adjust the allocation and
* baseline. Standard adjustments include removing the widget's
* margins, and applying the widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and
* #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* If the child widget does not have a valign of %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE the
* baseline argument is ignored and -1 is used instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
* @param baseline The baseline of the child, or -1
*/
size_allocate_with_baseline(allocation: Gtk.Allocation, baseline: number): void;
/**
* This function is typically used when implementing a #GtkContainer
* subclass. Obtains the preferred size of a widget. The container
* uses this information to arrange its child widgets and decide what
* size allocations to give them with gtk_widget_size_allocate().
*
* You can also call this function from an application, with some
* caveats. Most notably, getting a size request requires the widget
* to be associated with a screen, because font information may be
* needed. Multihead-aware applications should keep this in mind.
*
* Also remember that the size request is not necessarily the size
* a widget will actually be allocated.
*/
size_request(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* This function attaches the widget’s #GtkStyle to the widget's
* #GdkWindow. It is a replacement for
*
*
* ```
* widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
* ```
*
*
* and should only ever be called in a derived widget’s “realize”
* implementation which does not chain up to its parent class'
* “realize” implementation, because one of the parent classes
* (finally #GtkWidget) would attach the style itself.
*/
style_attach(): void;
/**
* Gets the value of a style property of `widget`.
* @param property_name the name of a style property
* @param value location to return the property value
*/
style_get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
* This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget` to be
* emitted.
*/
thaw_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Translate coordinates relative to `src_widget’`s allocation to coordinates
* relative to `dest_widget’`s allocations. In order to perform this
* operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
* toplevel.
* @param dest_widget a #GtkWidget
* @param src_x X position relative to @src_widget
* @param src_y Y position relative to @src_widget
* @returns %FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there was no common ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in *@dest_x and *@dest_y. Otherwise %TRUE.
*/
translate_coordinates(dest_widget: Gtk.Widget, src_x: number, src_y: number): [boolean, number, number];
/**
* Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of `widget`
* is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
* information.
*/
trigger_tooltip_query(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
unmap(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Should be called by implementations of the remove method
* on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
*/
unparent(): void;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
unrealize(): void;
/**
* Unregisters a #GdkWindow from the widget that was previously set up with
* gtk_widget_register_window(). You need to call this when the window is
* no longer used by the widget, such as when you destroy it.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
unregister_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns off flag
* values for the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
* See gtk_widget_set_state_flags().
* @param flags State flags to turn off
*/
unset_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_allocation(baseline: number): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_request(minimum_baseline: number, natural_baseline: number): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size allocation assigned
* by a #GtkContainer using gtk_widget_size_allocate(), into an actual
* size allocation to be used by the widget. adjust_size_allocation
* adjusts to a child widget’s actual allocation
* from what a parent container computed for the
* child. The adjusted allocation must be entirely within the original
* allocation. In any custom implementation, chain up to the default
* #GtkWidget implementation of this method, which applies the margin
* and alignment properties of #GtkWidget. Chain up
* before performing your own adjustments so your
* own adjustments remove more allocation after the #GtkWidget base
* class has already removed margin and alignment. The natural size
* passed in should be adjusted in the same way as the allocated size,
* which allows adjustments to perform alignments or other changes
* based on natural size.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
* @param allocated_pos
* @param allocated_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_allocation(
orientation: Gtk.Orientation,
minimum_size: number,
natural_size: number,
allocated_pos: number,
allocated_size: number,
): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size request from a widget's
* #GtkSizeRequestMode virtual method implementations into a size request to
* be used by parent containers in laying out the widget.
* adjust_size_request adjusts from a child widget's
* original request to what a parent container should
* use for layout. The `for_size` argument will be -1 if the request should
* not be for a particular size in the opposing orientation, i.e. if the
* request is not height-for-width or width-for-height. If `for_size` is
* greater than -1, it is the proposed allocation in the opposing
* orientation that we need the request for. Implementations of
* adjust_size_request should chain up to the default implementation,
* which applies #GtkWidget’s margin properties and imposes any values
* from gtk_widget_set_size_request(). Chaining up should be last,
* after your subclass adjusts the request, so
* #GtkWidget can apply constraints and add the margin properly.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_request(orientation: Gtk.Orientation, minimum_size: number, natural_size: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_press_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_release_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
*/
vfunc_can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
vfunc_child_notify(child_property: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the composited status of
* widgets screen changes. See gdk_screen_is_composited().
*/
vfunc_composited_changed(): void;
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this
* widget extra space when possible.
* @param hexpand_p
* @param vexpand_p
*/
vfunc_compute_expand(hexpand_p: boolean, vexpand_p: boolean): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the size, position or
* stacking of the widget’s window has changed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_configure_event(event: Gdk.EventConfigure): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a redirected window belonging to
* widget gets drawn into.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_damage_event(event: Gdk.EventExpose): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel
* window is closed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_delete_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
vfunc_destroy(): void;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_destroy_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the text direction of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_direction
*/
vfunc_direction_changed(previous_direction: Gtk.TextDirection): void;
/**
* Seldomly overidden.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_child_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* started.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_begin(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag
* with the action %GDK_ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_data_delete(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when the drop
* site requests the data which is dragged.
* @param context
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_get(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the
* dragged data has been received.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_received(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
x: number,
y: number,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the user drops the
* data onto the widget.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_drop(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* finished.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_end(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag has
* failed.
* @param context
* @param result
*/
vfunc_drag_failed(context: Gdk.DragContext, result: Gtk.DragResult): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves
* the widget.
* @param context
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_leave(context: Gdk.DragContext, time_: number): void;
/**
* signal emitted on the drop site when the user moves
* the cursor over the widget during a drag.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_motion(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
* @param cr
*/
vfunc_draw(cr: cairo.Context): boolean;
/**
* Signal event will be emitted when the pointer
* enters the widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_enter_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
*/
vfunc_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
vfunc_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_in_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_out_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
*/
vfunc_get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
*/
vfunc_get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Signal emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab
* on a window belonging to widget gets broken.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_grab_broken_event(event: Gdk.EventGrabBroken): boolean;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
vfunc_grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a
* GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or
* when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed.
* @param was_grabbed
*/
vfunc_grab_notify(was_grabbed: boolean): void;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
vfunc_hide(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the anchored state of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_toplevel
*/
vfunc_hierarchy_changed(previous_toplevel: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a key is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_press_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a key is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_release_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
*/
vfunc_keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Will be emitted when the pointer leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_leave_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
vfunc_map(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_map_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
*/
vfunc_mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the pointer moves over
* the widget’s #GdkWindow.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_motion_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventMotion): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a change of focus is requested
* @param direction
*/
vfunc_move_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new parent has been set on a
* widget.
* @param previous_parent
*/
vfunc_parent_set(previous_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted whenever a widget should pop up a
* context menu.
*/
vfunc_popup_menu(): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a property on
* the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_property_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventProperty): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_in_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_out_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when “has-tooltip” is %TRUE and the
* hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above”
* widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.
* @param x
* @param y
* @param keyboard_tooltip
* @param tooltip
*/
vfunc_query_tooltip(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tooltip: boolean, tooltip: Gtk.Tooltip): boolean;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
vfunc_queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
vfunc_realize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the screen of a widget has
* changed.
* @param previous_screen
*/
vfunc_screen_changed(previous_screen: Gdk.Screen): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is
* pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_scroll_event(event: Gdk.EventScroll): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the the
* widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_clear_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_get(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;
vfunc_selection_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_received(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, time_: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when another
* client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's
* window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_request_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
vfunc_show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
vfunc_show_all(): void;
vfunc_show_help(help_type: Gtk.WidgetHelpType): boolean;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
vfunc_size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state
* changes. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_state
*/
vfunc_state_changed(previous_state: Gtk.StateType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state changes,
* see gtk_widget_get_state_flags().
* @param previous_state_flags
*/
vfunc_state_flags_changed(previous_state_flags: Gtk.StateFlags): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new style has been set on a
* widget. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_style
*/
vfunc_style_set(previous_style: Gtk.Style): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the GtkStyleContext of a widget
* is changed.
*/
vfunc_style_updated(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a touch event happens
* @param event
*/
vfunc_touch_event(event: Gdk.EventTouch): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
vfunc_unmap(): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the widget’s window is
* unmapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_unmap_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
vfunc_unrealize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is
* obscured or unobscured.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_visibility_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventVisibility): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the state of the toplevel
* window associated to the widget changes.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_window_state_event(event: Gdk.EventWindowState): boolean;
}
namespace FailureRenderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Renderer.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
label: string;
}
}
/**
* A renderer that can be used for unsupported data.
*/
class FailureRenderer extends GObject.Object implements Renderer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<FailureRenderer>;
// Properties
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<FailureRenderer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](label: string | null, error: GLib.Error): FailureRenderer;
// Static methods
/**
* Create a new renderer for unsupported data.
* @param label the label for the failure
*/
static new_unsupported(label: string): Renderer;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Get the PKCS#11 attributes, if any, set for this renderer to display.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Set the PKCS#11 attributes for this renderer to display.
* @param attrs attributes to set
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ImportButton {
// Signal callback interfaces
interface Imported {
(importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error): void;
}
interface Importing {
(importer: GObject.Object): void;
}
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Button.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Actionable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Activatable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
}
/**
* A button which imports keys and certificates.
*
* The import button shows a spinner when the button is activated. When more
* than one importer is available, it shows a drop down to select which to
* import to.
*/
class ImportButton
extends Gtk.Button
implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Actionable, Gtk.Activatable, Gtk.Buildable
{
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImportButton>;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<ImportButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](label?: string | null): ImportButton;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Button.new
static ['new'](...args: never[]): any;
// Signals
connect(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
connect_after(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
emit(id: string, ...args: any[]): void;
connect(
signal: 'imported',
callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error) => void,
): number;
connect_after(
signal: 'imported',
callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error) => void,
): number;
emit(signal: 'imported', importer: GObject.Object, error: GLib.Error): void;
connect(signal: 'importing', callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object) => void): number;
connect_after(signal: 'importing', callback: (_source: this, importer: GObject.Object) => void): number;
emit(signal: 'importing', importer: GObject.Object): void;
// Virtual methods
/**
* Emitted when the import completes, or fails.
* @param importer
* @param error
*/
vfunc_imported(importer: Gcr.Importer, error: GLib.Error): void;
/**
* Emitted when the import begins.
* @param importer
*/
vfunc_importing(importer: Gcr.Importer): void;
// Methods
/**
* Queue an item to import via the button
* @param parsed a parsed item
*/
add_parsed(parsed: Gcr.Parsed): void;
// Inherited properties
get action_name(): string;
set action_name(val: string);
get actionName(): string;
set actionName(val: string);
get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);
get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);
/**
* The action that this activatable will activate and receive
* updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the this property and
* > call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.
*/
get related_action(): Gtk.Action;
set related_action(val: Gtk.Action);
/**
* The action that this activatable will activate and receive
* updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the this property and
* > call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.
*/
get relatedAction(): Gtk.Action;
set relatedAction(val: Gtk.Action);
/**
* Whether this activatable should reset its layout
* and appearance when setting the related action or when
* the action changes appearance.
*
* See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
* should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
* > and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
* > widget when it changes.
*/
get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether this activatable should reset its layout
* and appearance when setting the related action or when
* the action changes appearance.
*
* See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
* should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
* > and call gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() on the activatable
* > widget when it changes.
*/
get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);
get app_paintable(): boolean;
set app_paintable(val: boolean);
get appPaintable(): boolean;
set appPaintable(val: boolean);
get can_default(): boolean;
set can_default(val: boolean);
get canDefault(): boolean;
set canDefault(val: boolean);
get can_focus(): boolean;
set can_focus(val: boolean);
get canFocus(): boolean;
set canFocus(val: boolean);
get composite_child(): boolean;
get compositeChild(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get double_buffered(): boolean;
set double_buffered(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget is double buffered.
*/
get doubleBuffered(): boolean;
set doubleBuffered(val: boolean);
get events(): Gdk.EventMask;
set events(val: Gdk.EventMask);
/**
* Whether to expand in both directions. Setting this sets both #GtkWidget:hexpand and #GtkWidget:vexpand
*/
get expand(): boolean;
set expand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focus_on_click(): boolean;
set focus_on_click(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*
* This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
*
* Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
* GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
*/
get focusOnClick(): boolean;
set focusOnClick(val: boolean);
/**
* How to distribute horizontal space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get halign(): Gtk.Align;
set halign(val: Gtk.Align);
get has_default(): boolean;
set has_default(val: boolean);
get hasDefault(): boolean;
set hasDefault(val: boolean);
get has_focus(): boolean;
set has_focus(val: boolean);
get hasFocus(): boolean;
set hasFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get has_tooltip(): boolean;
set has_tooltip(val: boolean);
/**
* Enables or disables the emission of #GtkWidget::query-tooltip on `widget`.
* A value of %TRUE indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
* the widget will be queried using #GtkWidget::query-tooltip to determine
* whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
*
* Note that setting this property to %TRUE for the first time will change
* the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
* and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the
* property is set to %FALSE again.
*/
get hasTooltip(): boolean;
set hasTooltip(val: boolean);
get height_request(): number;
set height_request(val: number);
get heightRequest(): number;
set heightRequest(val: number);
/**
* Whether to expand horizontally. See gtk_widget_set_hexpand().
*/
get hexpand(): boolean;
set hexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpand_set(): boolean;
set hexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:hexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set().
*/
get hexpandSet(): boolean;
set hexpandSet(val: boolean);
get is_focus(): boolean;
set is_focus(val: boolean);
get isFocus(): boolean;
set isFocus(val: boolean);
/**
* Sets all four sides' margin at once. If read, returns max
* margin on any side.
*/
get margin(): number;
set margin(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_bottom(): number;
set margin_bottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on bottom side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginBottom(): number;
set marginBottom(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_end(): number;
set margin_end(val: number);
/**
* Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginEnd(): number;
set marginEnd(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_left(): number;
set margin_left(val: number);
/**
* Margin on left side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginLeft(): number;
set marginLeft(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_right(): number;
set margin_right(val: number);
/**
* Margin on right side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginRight(): number;
set marginRight(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_start(): number;
set margin_start(val: number);
/**
* Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
* left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginStart(): number;
set marginStart(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get margin_top(): number;
set margin_top(val: number);
/**
* Margin on top side of widget.
*
* This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
* request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
* gtk_widget_set_size_request() for example.
*/
get marginTop(): number;
set marginTop(val: number);
get name(): string;
set name(val: string);
get no_show_all(): boolean;
set no_show_all(val: boolean);
get noShowAll(): boolean;
set noShowAll(val: boolean);
/**
* The requested opacity of the widget. See gtk_widget_set_opacity() for
* more details about window opacity.
*
* Before 3.8 this was only available in GtkWindow
*/
get opacity(): number;
set opacity(val: number);
get parent(): Gtk.Container;
set parent(val: Gtk.Container);
get receives_default(): boolean;
set receives_default(val: boolean);
get receivesDefault(): boolean;
set receivesDefault(val: boolean);
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scale_factor(): number;
/**
* The scale factor of the widget. See gtk_widget_get_scale_factor() for
* more details about widget scaling.
*/
get scaleFactor(): number;
get sensitive(): boolean;
set sensitive(val: boolean);
/**
* The style of the widget, which contains information about how it will look (colors, etc).
*/
get style(): Gtk.Style;
set style(val: Gtk.Style);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_markup(): string;
set tooltip_markup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
* with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipMarkup(): string;
set tooltipMarkup(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltip_text(): string;
set tooltip_text(val: string);
/**
* Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
*
* Also see gtk_tooltip_set_text().
*
* This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
* tooltip shown if the given string is not %NULL: #GtkWidget:has-tooltip
* will automatically be set to %TRUE and there will be taken care of
* #GtkWidget::query-tooltip in the default signal handler.
*
* Note that if both #GtkWidget:tooltip-text and #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup
* are set, the last one wins.
*/
get tooltipText(): string;
set tooltipText(val: string);
/**
* How to distribute vertical space if widget gets extra space, see #GtkAlign
*/
get valign(): Gtk.Align;
set valign(val: Gtk.Align);
/**
* Whether to expand vertically. See gtk_widget_set_vexpand().
*/
get vexpand(): boolean;
set vexpand(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpand_set(): boolean;
set vexpand_set(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether to use the #GtkWidget:vexpand property. See gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set().
*/
get vexpandSet(): boolean;
set vexpandSet(val: boolean);
get visible(): boolean;
set visible(val: boolean);
get width_request(): number;
set width_request(val: number);
get widthRequest(): number;
set widthRequest(val: number);
/**
* The widget's window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
*/
get window(): Gdk.Window;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Gets the action name for `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_name() for more information.
* @returns the action name, or %NULL if none is set
*/
get_action_name(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value() for more information.
* @returns the current target value
*/
get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;
/**
* Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
* associated. If `action_name` is %NULL then the widget will be
* unassociated from any previous action.
*
* Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
* located) within the hierarchy of a #GtkApplicationWindow.
*
* Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
* containing #GtkApplicationWindow or its associated #GtkApplication,
* respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the #GMenu
* associated with the window.
* @param action_name an action name, or %NULL
*/
set_action_name(action_name?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
*
* If `target_value` is %NULL then the target value is unset.
*
* The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the
* parameter to activation of the action associated with the
* #GtkActionable widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
* should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
* is equal to the given target.
*
* Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a #GAction
* with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
* will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
* value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
* the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
* the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
* is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
* be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
* rendered inactive).
* @param target_value a #GVariant to set as the target value, or %NULL
*/
set_action_target_value(target_value?: GLib.Variant | null): void;
/**
* Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
* actionable widget.
*
* `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
* g_action_parse_detailed_name().
*
* (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
* this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
* `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
* `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
* as the target.)
* @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
*/
set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;
/**
* Gets the action name for `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_name() for more information.
*/
vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
*
* See gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value() for more information.
*/
vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;
/**
* Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
* associated. If `action_name` is %NULL then the widget will be
* unassociated from any previous action.
*
* Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
* located) within the hierarchy of a #GtkApplicationWindow.
*
* Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
* containing #GtkApplicationWindow or its associated #GtkApplication,
* respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the #GMenu
* associated with the window.
* @param action_name an action name, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_action_name(action_name?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
*
* If `target_value` is %NULL then the target value is unset.
*
* The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the
* parameter to activation of the action associated with the
* #GtkActionable widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
* should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
* is equal to the given target.
*
* Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a #GAction
* with string state in a typical “radio button” situation. Each button
* will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
* value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
* the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
* the action’s state to change to that value. Since the action’s state
* is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
* be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
* rendered inactive).
* @param target_value a #GVariant to set as the target value, or %NULL
*/
vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value?: GLib.Variant | null): void;
/**
* This is a utility function for #GtkActivatable implementors.
*
* When implementing #GtkActivatable you must call this when
* handling changes of the #GtkActivatable:related-action, and
* you must also use this to break references in #GObject->dispose().
*
* This function adds a reference to the currently set related
* action for you, it also makes sure the #GtkActivatable->update()
* method is called when the related #GtkAction properties change
* and registers to the action’s proxy list.
*
* > Be careful to call this before setting the local
* > copy of the #GtkAction property, since this function uses
* > gtk_activatable_get_related_action() to retrieve the
* > previous action.
* @param action the #GtkAction to set
*/
do_set_related_action(action: Gtk.Action): void;
/**
* Gets the related #GtkAction for `activatable`.
* @returns the related #GtkAction if one is set.
*/
get_related_action(): Gtk.Action;
/**
* Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
* and appearance when setting the related action or when
* the action changes appearance.
* @returns whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
*/
get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;
/**
* Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the #GtkActivatable:related-action
* > property and call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.
* @param action the #GtkAction to set
*/
set_related_action(action: Gtk.Action): void;
/**
* Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
* when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
*
* > #GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the
* > #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property and call
* > gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties() to update `activatable`
* > if needed.
* @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
*/
set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;
/**
* This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
* internally when the #GtkActivatable:related-action property is set
* or unset and by the implementing class when
* #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance changes.
* @param action the related #GtkAction or %NULL
*/
sync_action_properties(action?: Gtk.Action | null): void;
/**
* This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
* internally when the #GtkActivatable:related-action property is set
* or unset and by the implementing class when
* #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance changes.
* @param action the related #GtkAction or %NULL
*/
vfunc_sync_action_properties(action?: Gtk.Action | null): void;
/**
* Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
* You must check the #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property only apply action
* properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
* @param action
* @param property_name
*/
vfunc_update(action: Gtk.Action, property_name: string): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
/**
* For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
* this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
* press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
* activatable, the function returns %FALSE.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget was activatable
*/
activate(): boolean;
/**
* Installs an accelerator for this `widget` in `accel_group` that causes
* `accel_signal` to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
* The `accel_group` needs to be added to the widget’s toplevel via
* gtk_window_add_accel_group(), and the signal must be of type %G_SIGNAL_ACTION.
* Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
* runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
* user, use gtk_accel_map_add_entry() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path() or
* gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() instead.
* @param accel_signal widget signal to emit on accelerator activation
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget, added to its toplevel
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @param accel_flags flag accelerators, e.g. %GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE
*/
add_accelerator(
accel_signal: string,
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
accel_flags: Gtk.AccelFlags | null,
): void;
/**
* Adds the device events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_device_events() for details.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Adds the events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
* `widget`. See gtk_widget_set_events() and the
* [input handling overview][event-masks] for details.
* @param events an event mask, see #GdkEventMask
*/
add_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
* list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
* widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
* its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
* to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
* @param label a #GtkWidget that acts as a mnemonic label for @widget
*/
add_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Queues an animation frame update and adds a callback to be called
* before each frame. Until the tick callback is removed, it will be
* called frequently (usually at the frame rate of the output device
* or as quickly as the application can be repainted, whichever is
* slower). For this reason, is most suitable for handling graphics
* that change every frame or every few frames. The tick callback does
* not automatically imply a relayout or repaint. If you want a
* repaint or relayout, and aren’t changing widget properties that
* would trigger that (for example, changing the text of a #GtkLabel),
* then you will have to call gtk_widget_queue_resize() or
* gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() yourself.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() should generally be used for timing
* continuous animations and
* gdk_frame_timings_get_predicted_presentation_time() if you are
* trying to display isolated frames at particular times.
*
* This is a more convenient alternative to connecting directly to the
* #GdkFrameClock::update signal of #GdkFrameClock, since you don't
* have to worry about when a #GdkFrameClock is assigned to a widget.
* @param callback function to call for updating animations
* @returns an id for the connection of this callback. Remove the callback by passing it to gtk_widget_remove_tick_callback()
*/
add_tick_callback(callback: Gtk.TickCallback): number;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
* @returns %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
*/
can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
* writing an app, you’d use gtk_widget_grab_focus() to move the focus
* to a particular widget, and gtk_container_set_focus_chain() to
* change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those
* functions instead.
*
* gtk_widget_child_focus() is called by containers as the user moves
* around the window using keyboard shortcuts. `direction` indicates
* what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab
* forward, tab backward). gtk_widget_child_focus() emits the
* #GtkWidget::focus signal; widgets override the default handler
* for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.
*
* The default ::focus handler for a widget should return %TRUE if
* moving in `direction` left the focus on a focusable location inside
* that widget, and %FALSE if moving in `direction` moved the focus
* outside the widget. If returning %TRUE, widgets normally
* call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
* if returning %FALSE, they don’t modify the current focus location.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if focus ended up inside @widget
*/
child_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
child_notify(child_property: string): void;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget’s type,
* never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
*/
class_path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this widget extra space
* when possible. Containers should check this, rather than
* looking at gtk_widget_get_hexpand() or gtk_widget_get_vexpand().
*
* This function already checks whether the widget is visible, so
* visibility does not need to be checked separately. Non-visible
* widgets are not expanded.
*
* The computed expand value uses either the expand setting explicitly
* set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set,
* the widget may expand if some of its children do.
* @param orientation expand direction
* @returns whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
*/
compute_expand(orientation: Gtk.Orientation | null): boolean;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoContext with the appropriate font map,
* font options, font description, and base direction for drawing
* text for this widget. See also gtk_widget_get_pango_context().
* @returns the new #PangoContext
*/
create_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
* font description, and base direction for drawing text for
* this widget.
*
* If you keep a #PangoLayout created in this way around, you need
* to re-create it when the widget #PangoContext is replaced.
* This can be tracked by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal
* on the widget.
* @param text text to set on the layout (can be %NULL)
* @returns the new #PangoLayout
*/
create_pango_layout(text?: string | null): Pango.Layout;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
destroy(): void;
/**
* This function sets *`widget_pointer` to %NULL if `widget_pointer` !=
* %NULL. It’s intended to be used as a callback connected to the
* “destroy” signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
* as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
* as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
* be set to %NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
* of the same dialog.
* @param widget_pointer address of a variable that contains @widget
*/
destroyed(widget_pointer: Gtk.Widget): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `device` has been shadowed by a GTK+
* device grab on another widget, so it would stop sending
* events to `widget`. This may be used in the
* #GtkWidget::grab-notify signal to check for specific
* devices. See gtk_device_grab_add().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE if there is an ongoing grab on @device by another #GtkWidget than @widget.
*/
device_is_shadowed(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* This function is equivalent to gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates(),
* passing -1, -1 as coordinates.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event?: Gdk.Event | null,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Initiates a drag on the source side. The function only needs to be used
* when the application is starting drags itself, and is not needed when
* gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
*
* The `event` is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
* grab the pointer. If `event` is %NULL, then %GDK_CURRENT_TIME will be used.
* However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
* used to get information about the drag.
*
* Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by
* calling this function:
*
* 1. During a #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* immediately when the user presses the mouse button. Pass the `event`
* that you have in your #GtkWidget::button-press-event handler.
*
* 2. During a #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler, if you want to start a drag
* when the mouse moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press.
* Pass the `event` that you have in your #GtkWidget::motion-notify-event handler.
*
* 3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
* button is held down for some time. Try to save the last event that you got
* from the mouse, using gdk_event_copy(), and pass it to this function
* (remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done).
* If you really cannot pass a real event, pass %NULL instead.
* @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the source can provide the data
* @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
* @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
* @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag, or %NULL if none can be obtained.
* @param x The initial x coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @param y The initial y coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space of @widget. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from @event or the current pointer position
* @returns the context for this drag
*/
drag_begin_with_coordinates(
targets: Gtk.TargetList,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
button: number,
event: Gdk.Event | null,
x: number,
y: number,
): Gdk.DragContext;
/**
* Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (`start_x,` `start_y)` and ending
* at (`current_x,` `current_y)` has passed the GTK+ drag threshold, and thus
* should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
* @param start_x X coordinate of start of drag
* @param start_y Y coordinate of start of drag
* @param current_x current X coordinate
* @param current_y current Y coordinate
* @returns %TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.
*/
drag_check_threshold(start_x: number, start_y: number, current_x: number, current_y: number): boolean;
/**
* Add the image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag destination. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
*/
drag_dest_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Looks for a match between the supported targets of `context` and the
* `dest_target_list,` returning the first matching target, otherwise
* returning %GDK_NONE. `dest_target_list` should usually be the return
* value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
* have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
* that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
* passes the correct target list to this function.
* @param context drag context
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
* @returns first target that the source offers and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
*/
drag_dest_find_target(context: Gdk.DragContext, target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): Gdk.Atom;
/**
* Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_dest_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
* emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion signals.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget always emits #GtkWidget::drag-motion events
*/
drag_dest_get_track_motion(): boolean;
/**
* Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
*
* The default behaviors listed in `flags` have an effect similar
* to installing default handlers for the widget’s drag-and-drop signals
* (#GtkWidget::drag-motion, #GtkWidget::drag-drop, ...). They all exist
* for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
* sufficient to connect to the widget’s #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
* signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
*
* Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
* as described in the documentation for #GtkWidget::drag-motion. The default
* behaviors described by `flags` make some assumptions, that can conflict
* with your own signal handlers. For instance #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP causes
* invokations of gdk_drag_status() in the context of #GtkWidget::drag-motion,
* and invokations of gtk_drag_finish() in #GtkWidget::drag-data-received.
* Especially the later is dramatic, when your own #GtkWidget::drag-motion
* handler calls gtk_drag_get_data() to inspect the dragged data.
*
* There’s no way to set a default action here, you can use the
* #GtkWidget::drag-motion callback for that. Here’s an example which selects
* the action to use depending on whether the control key is pressed or not:
*
* ```c
* static void
* drag_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
* GdkDragContext *context,
* gint x,
* gint y,
* guint time)
* {
* GdkModifierType mask;
*
* gdk_window_get_pointer (gtk_widget_get_window (widget),
* NULL, NULL, &mask);
* if (mask & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_COPY, time);
* else
* gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
* }
* ```
*
* @param flags which types of default drag behavior to use
* @param targets a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntrys indicating the drop types that this @widget will accept, or %NULL. Later you can access the list with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list() and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
* @param actions a bitmask of possible actions for a drop onto this @widget.
*/
drag_dest_set(
flags: Gtk.DestDefaults | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets this widget as a proxy for drops to another window.
* @param proxy_window the window to which to forward drag events
* @param protocol the drag protocol which the @proxy_window accepts (You can use gdk_drag_get_protocol() to determine this)
* @param use_coordinates If %TRUE, send the same coordinates to the destination, because it is an embedded subwindow.
*/
drag_dest_set_proxy(
proxy_window: Gdk.Window,
protocol: Gdk.DragProtocol | null,
use_coordinates: boolean,
): void;
/**
* Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
* gtk_drag_dest_set().
* @param target_list list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_dest_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Tells the widget to emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion and
* #GtkWidget::drag-leave events regardless of the targets and the
* %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION flag.
*
* This may be used when a widget wants to do generic
* actions regardless of the targets that the source offers.
* @param track_motion whether to accept all targets
*/
drag_dest_set_track_motion(track_motion: boolean): void;
/**
* Clears information about a drop destination set with
* gtk_drag_dest_set(). The widget will no longer receive
* notification of drags.
*/
drag_dest_unset(): void;
/**
* Gets the data associated with a drag. When the data
* is received or the retrieval fails, GTK+ will emit a
* #GtkWidget::drag-data-received signal. Failure of the retrieval
* is indicated by the length field of the `selection_data`
* signal parameter being negative. However, when gtk_drag_get_data()
* is called implicitely because the %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP was set,
* then the widget will not receive notification of failed
* drops.
* @param context the drag context
* @param target the target (form of the data) to retrieve
* @param time_ a timestamp for retrieving the data. This will generally be the time received in a #GtkWidget::drag-motion or #GtkWidget::drag-drop signal
*/
drag_get_data(context: Gdk.DragContext, target: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): void;
/**
* Highlights a widget as a currently hovered drop target.
* To end the highlight, call gtk_drag_unhighlight().
* GTK+ calls this automatically if %GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_HIGHLIGHT is set.
*/
drag_highlight(): void;
/**
* Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_image_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_text_targets(): void;
/**
* Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelectionData to
* the target list of the drag source. The targets
* are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
* use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
* gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
*/
drag_source_add_uri_targets(): void;
/**
* Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
* drag-and-drop.
* @returns the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
*/
drag_source_get_target_list(): Gtk.TargetList | null;
/**
* Sets up a widget so that GTK+ will start a drag operation when the user
* clicks and drags on the widget. The widget must have a window.
* @param start_button_mask the bitmask of buttons that can start the drag
* @param targets the table of targets that the drag will support, may be %NULL
* @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget
*/
drag_source_set(
start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
targets: Gtk.TargetEntry[] | null,
actions: Gdk.DragAction | null,
): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to `icon`. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon A #GIcon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a themed icon. See the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
* @param icon_name name of icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular widget
* from a #GdkPixbuf. GTK+ retains a reference for `pixbuf` and will
* release it when it is no longer needed.
* @param pixbuf the #GdkPixbuf for the drag icon
*/
drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;
/**
* Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
* to a stock icon.
* @param stock_id the ID of the stock icon to use
*/
drag_source_set_icon_stock(stock_id: string): void;
/**
* Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
* The widget must first be made into a drag source with
* gtk_drag_source_set().
* @param target_list list of draggable targets, or %NULL for none
*/
drag_source_set_target_list(target_list?: Gtk.TargetList | null): void;
/**
* Undoes the effects of gtk_drag_source_set().
*/
drag_source_unset(): void;
/**
* Removes a highlight set by gtk_drag_highlight() from
* a widget.
*/
drag_unhighlight(): void;
/**
* Draws `widget` to `cr`. The top left corner of the widget will be
* drawn to the currently set origin point of `cr`.
*
* You should pass a cairo context as `cr` argument that is in an
* original state. Otherwise the resulting drawing is undefined. For
* example changing the operator using cairo_set_operator() or the
* line width using cairo_set_line_width() might have unwanted side
* effects.
* You may however change the context’s transform matrix - like with
* cairo_scale(), cairo_translate() or cairo_set_matrix() and clip
* region with cairo_clip() prior to calling this function. Also, it
* is fine to modify the context with cairo_save() and
* cairo_push_group() prior to calling this function.
*
* Note that special-purpose widgets may contain special code for
* rendering to the screen and might appear differently on screen
* and when rendered using gtk_widget_draw().
* @param cr a cairo context to draw to
*/
draw(cr: cairo.Context): void;
/**
* Ensures that `widget` has a style (`widget->`style).
*
* Not a very useful function; most of the time, if you
* want the style, the widget is realized, and realized
* widgets are guaranteed to have a style already.
*/
ensure_style(): void;
/**
* Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
* If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
* gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
*
* Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
* ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
* or window manager that is used.
*/
error_bell(): void;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Stops emission of #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget`. The
* signals are queued until gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify() is called
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
*/
freeze_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
* @returns the #AtkObject associated with @widget
*/
get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves the #GActionGroup that was registered using `prefix`. The resulting
* #GActionGroup may have been registered to `widget` or any #GtkWidget in its
* ancestry.
*
* If no action group was found matching `prefix,` then %NULL is returned.
* @param prefix The “prefix” of the action group.
* @returns A #GActionGroup or %NULL.
*/
get_action_group(prefix: string): Gio.ActionGroup | null;
/**
* Returns the baseline that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function, and when allocating child
* widgets in #GtkWidget::size_allocate.
* @returns the baseline of the @widget, or -1 if none
*/
get_allocated_baseline(): number;
/**
* Returns the height that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the height of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_height(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocated size.
*
* This function returns the last values passed to
* gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline(). The value differs from
* the size returned in gtk_widget_get_allocation() in that functions
* like gtk_widget_set_halign() can adjust the allocation, but not
* the value returned by this function.
*
* If a widget is not visible, its allocated size is 0.
*/
get_allocated_size(): [Gtk.Allocation, number];
/**
* Returns the width that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
* This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
* for the #GtkWidget::draw function.
* @returns the width of the @widget
*/
get_allocated_width(): number;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s allocation.
*
* Note, when implementing a #GtkContainer: a widget’s allocation will
* be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent
* container typically calls gtk_widget_size_allocate() with an
* allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin
* and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget.
* gtk_widget_get_allocation() returns the adjusted allocation that
* was actually assigned to the widget. The adjusted allocation is
* guaranteed to be completely contained within the
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() allocation, however. So a #GtkContainer
* is guaranteed that its children stay inside the assigned bounds,
* but not that they have exactly the bounds the container assigned.
* There is no way to get the original allocation assigned by
* gtk_widget_size_allocate(), since it isn’t stored; if a container
* implementation needs that information it will have to track it itself.
*/
get_allocation(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Gets the first ancestor of `widget` with type `widget_type`. For example,
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)` gets
* the first #GtkBox that’s an ancestor of `widget`. No reference will be
* added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
* about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
*
* Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
* considers `widget` to be an ancestor of itself.
* @param widget_type ancestor type
* @returns the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
*/
get_ancestor(widget_type: GObject.GType): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
*/
get_app_paintable(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_default(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_can_focus(): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
* `widget->`requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
* geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_size_request()),
* in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
* requisition.
*
* This function differs from gtk_widget_size_request() in that
* it retrieves the last size request value from `widget->`requisition,
* while gtk_widget_size_request() actually calls the "size_request" method
* on `widget` to compute the size request and fill in `widget->`requisition,
* and only then returns `widget->`requisition.
*
* Because this function does not call the “size_request” method, it
* can only be used when you know that `widget->`requisition is
* up-to-date, that is, gtk_widget_size_request() has been called
* since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
* implementations have this information; applications should use
* gtk_widget_size_request().
*/
get_child_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
* If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
* needs reorganization.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
*/
get_child_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s clip area.
*
* The clip area is the area in which all of `widget'`s drawing will
* happen. Other toolkits call it the bounding box.
*
* Historically, in GTK+ the clip area has been equal to the allocation
* retrieved via gtk_widget_get_allocation().
*/
get_clip(): Gtk.Allocation;
/**
* Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
* be used with `widget`. `widget` must have a #GdkDisplay
* associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
* window.
* @param selection a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the default clipboard. Another common value is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives the primary X selection.
* @returns the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard object has been created, it is persistent for all time.
*/
get_clipboard(selection: Gdk.Atom): Gtk.Clipboard;
/**
* Obtains the composite name of a widget.
* @returns the composite name of @widget, or %NULL if @widget is not a composite child. The string should be freed when it is no longer needed.
*/
get_composite_name(): string;
/**
* Returns whether `device` can interact with `widget` and its
* children. See gtk_widget_set_device_enabled().
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns %TRUE is @device is enabled for @widget
*/
get_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;
/**
* Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
* are the events that the widget will receive when `device` operates on it.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @returns device event mask for @widget
*/
get_device_events(device: Gdk.Device): Gdk.EventMask;
/**
* Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
* gtk_widget_set_direction().
* @returns the reading direction for the widget.
*/
get_direction(): Gtk.TextDirection;
/**
* Get the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create display specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_display(): Gdk.Display;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
*/
get_double_buffered(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for the widget. These are the
* events that the widget will receive.
*
* Note: Internally, the widget event mask will be the logical OR of the event
* mask set through gtk_widget_set_events() or gtk_widget_add_events(), and the
* event mask necessary to cater for every #GtkEventController created for the
* widget.
* @returns event mask for @widget
*/
get_events(): number;
/**
* Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* See gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
*/
get_focus_on_click(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the font map that has been set with gtk_widget_set_font_map().
* @returns A #PangoFontMap, or %NULL
*/
get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;
/**
* Returns the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering. When not set,
* the defaults font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @returns the #cairo_font_options_t or %NULL if not set
*/
get_font_options(): cairo.FontOptions | null;
/**
* Obtains the frame clock for a widget. The frame clock is a global
* “ticker” that can be used to drive animations and repaints. The
* most common reason to get the frame clock is to call
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), in order to get a time to use for
* animating. For example you might record the start of the animation
* with an initial value from gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time(), and
* then update the animation by calling
* gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time() again during each repaint.
*
* gdk_frame_clock_request_phase() will result in a new frame on the
* clock, but won’t necessarily repaint any widgets. To repaint a
* widget, you have to use gtk_widget_queue_draw() which invalidates
* the widget (thus scheduling it to receive a draw on the next
* frame). gtk_widget_queue_draw() will also end up requesting a frame
* on the appropriate frame clock.
*
* A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is
* mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can
* change the widget’s frame clock.
*
* Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
* @returns a #GdkFrameClock, or %NULL if widget is unrealized
*/
get_frame_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock | null;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:halign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. Baselines are not supported for horizontal
* alignment.
* @returns the horizontal alignment of @widget
*/
get_halign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @returns current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
*/
get_has_tooltip(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
* gtk_widget_set_has_window().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_has_window(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Containers should use gtk_widget_compute_expand() rather than
* this function, to see whether a widget, or any of its children,
* has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to
* expand, the parent may ask to expand also.
*
* This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather
* than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
* wants to expand.
* @returns whether hexpand flag is set
*/
get_hexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_hexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @returns whether hexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_hexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the widget is mapped.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
get_mapped(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @returns The bottom margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_bottom(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @returns The end margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_end(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @returns The left margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_left(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @returns The right margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_right(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @returns The start margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_start(): number;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @returns The top margin of @widget
*/
get_margin_top(): number;
/**
* Returns the modifier mask the `widget’`s windowing system backend
* uses for a particular purpose.
*
* See gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask().
* @param intent the use case for the modifier mask
* @returns the modifier mask used for @intent.
*/
get_modifier_mask(intent: Gdk.ModifierIntent | null): Gdk.ModifierType;
/**
* Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
* gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
* #GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
* modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
* style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
* returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
*
* Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
* normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
* the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
* thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
* to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
* @returns the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
*/
get_modifier_style(): Gtk.RcStyle;
/**
* Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
* significance of widget names.
* @returns name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
*/
get_name(): string;
/**
* Returns the current value of the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
* which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all()
* will affect this widget.
* @returns the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
*/
get_no_show_all(): boolean;
/**
* Fetches the requested opacity for this widget.
* See gtk_widget_set_opacity().
* @returns the requested opacity for this widget.
*/
get_opacity(): number;
/**
* Gets a #PangoContext with the appropriate font map, font description,
* and base direction for this widget. Unlike the context returned
* by gtk_widget_create_pango_context(), this context is owned by
* the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
* or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
* match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
* by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal on the widget.
* @returns the #PangoContext for the widget.
*/
get_pango_context(): Pango.Context;
/**
* Returns the parent container of `widget`.
* @returns the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
*/
get_parent(): Gtk.Widget | null;
/**
* Gets `widget’`s parent window, or %NULL if it does not have one.
* @returns the parent window of @widget, or %NULL if it does not have a parent window.
*/
get_parent_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWidgetPath representing `widget,` if the widget
* is not connected to a toplevel widget, a partial path will be
* created.
* @returns The #GtkWidgetPath representing @widget
*/
get_path(): Gtk.WidgetPath;
/**
* Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(); and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*/
get_pointer(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking
* into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
*
* This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
* not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used
* to deduce toplevel window and menu sizes as well as child widgets in
* free-form containers such as GtkLayout.
*
* Handle with care. Note that the natural height of a height-for-width
* widget will generally be a smaller size than the minimum height, since the required
* height for the natural width is generally smaller than the required height for
* the minimum width.
*
* Use gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width() if you want to support
* baseline alignment.
*/
get_preferred_size(): [Gtk.Requisition | null, Gtk.Requisition | null];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is realized.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_realized(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is always treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
* @returns %TRUE if @widget acts as the default widget when focused, %FALSE otherwise
*/
get_receives_default(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
* @returns The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @widget.
*/
get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Retrieves the widget’s requisition.
*
* This function should only be used by widget implementations in
* order to figure whether the widget’s requisition has actually
* changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
* gtk_widget_queue_resize() instead of gtk_widget_queue_draw()).
*
* Normally, gtk_widget_size_request() should be used.
*/
get_requisition(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
* only be called after the widget has been added to a widget
* hierarchy with #GtkWindow at the top.
*
* The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
* #GdkWindow associated with the window. In general, you should only
* create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
* and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_root_window(): Gdk.Window;
/**
* Retrieves the internal scale factor that maps from window coordinates
* to the actual device pixels. On traditional systems this is 1, on
* high density outputs, it can be a higher value (typically 2).
*
* See gdk_window_get_scale_factor().
* @returns the scale factor for @widget
*/
get_scale_factor(): number;
/**
* Get the #GdkScreen from the toplevel window associated with
* this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
* has been added to a widget hierarchy with a #GtkWindow
* at the top.
*
* In general, you should only create screen specific
* resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
* free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
* @returns the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
*/
get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;
/**
* Returns the widget’s sensitivity (in the sense of returning
* the value that has been set using gtk_widget_set_sensitive()).
*
* The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
* own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See gtk_widget_is_sensitive().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is sensitive
*/
get_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the settings object holding the settings used for this widget.
*
* Note that this function can only be called when the #GtkWidget
* is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific
* to a particular #GdkScreen.
* @returns the relevant #GtkSettings object
*/
get_settings(): Gtk.Settings;
/**
* Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in `width` or
* `height` indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
* and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. See
* gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
* actually request, call gtk_widget_get_preferred_size() instead of
* this function.
*/
get_size_request(): [number, number];
/**
* Returns the widget’s state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
* @returns the state of @widget.
*/
get_state(): Gtk.StateType;
/**
* Returns the widget state as a flag set. It is worth mentioning
* that the effective %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE state will be
* returned, that is, also based on parent insensitivity, even if
* `widget` itself is sensitive.
*
* Also note that if you are looking for a way to obtain the
* #GtkStateFlags to pass to a #GtkStyleContext method, you
* should look at gtk_style_context_get_state().
* @returns The state flags for widget
*/
get_state_flags(): Gtk.StateFlags;
/**
* Simply an accessor function that returns `widget->`style.
* @returns the widget’s #GtkStyle
*/
get_style(): Gtk.Style;
/**
* Returns the style context associated to `widget`. The returned object is
* guaranteed to be the same for the lifetime of `widget`.
* @returns a #GtkStyleContext. This memory is owned by @widget and must not be freed.
*/
get_style_context(): Gtk.StyleContext;
/**
* Returns %TRUE if `widget` is multiple pointer aware. See
* gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice() for more information.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is multidevice aware.
*/
get_support_multidevice(): boolean;
/**
* Fetch an object build from the template XML for `widget_type` in this `widget` instance.
*
* This will only report children which were previously declared with
* gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_full() or one of its
* variants.
*
* This function is only meant to be called for code which is private to the `widget_type` which
* declared the child and is meant for language bindings which cannot easily make use
* of the GObject structure offsets.
* @param widget_type The #GType to get a template child for
* @param name The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
* @returns The object built in the template XML with the id @name
*/
get_template_child<T = GObject.Object>(widget_type: GObject.GType, name: string): T;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_markup(): string | null;
/**
* Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
* @returns the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the returned string with g_free() when done.
*/
get_tooltip_text(): string | null;
/**
* Returns the #GtkWindow of the current tooltip. This can be the
* GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
* using gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window().
* @returns The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
*/
get_tooltip_window(): Gtk.Window;
/**
* This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy
* `widget` is a part of. If `widget` has no parent widgets, it will be
* returned as the topmost widget. No reference will be added to the
* returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.
*
* Note the difference in behavior vs. gtk_widget_get_ancestor();
* `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)`
* would return
* %NULL if `widget` wasn’t inside a toplevel window, and if the
* window was inside a #GtkWindow-derived widget which was in turn
* inside the toplevel #GtkWindow. While the second case may
* seem unlikely, it actually happens when a #GtkPlug is embedded
* inside a #GtkSocket within the same application.
*
* To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
* gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and call GTK_IS_WINDOW()
* on the result. For instance, to get the title of a widget's toplevel
* window, one might use:
*
* ```c
* static const char *
* get_widget_toplevel_title (GtkWidget *widget)
* {
* GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
* if (GTK_IS_WINDOW (toplevel))
* {
* return gtk_window_get_title (GTK_WINDOW (toplevel));
* }
*
* return NULL;
* }
* ```
*
* @returns the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself if there’s no ancestor.
*/
get_toplevel(): Gtk.Widget;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property.
*
* For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, but instead it will convert it to
* %GTK_ALIGN_FILL. If your widget want to support baseline aligned
* children it must use gtk_widget_get_valign_with_baseline(), or
* `g_object_get (widget, "valign", &value, NULL)`, which will
* also report the true value.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget, ignoring baseline alignment
*/
get_valign(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets the value of the #GtkWidget:valign property, including
* %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE.
* @returns the vertical alignment of @widget
*/
get_valign_with_baseline(): Gtk.Align;
/**
* Gets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand flag is set
*/
get_vexpand(): boolean;
/**
* Gets whether gtk_widget_set_vexpand() has been used to
* explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
*
* See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @returns whether vexpand has been explicitly set
*/
get_vexpand_set(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is visible. If you want to
* take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as
* visible, use gtk_widget_is_visible() instead.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_visible().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is visible
*/
get_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Gets the visual that will be used to render `widget`.
* @returns the visual for @widget
*/
get_visual(): Gdk.Visual;
/**
* Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
* @returns @widget’s window.
*/
get_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
/**
* Makes `widget` the current grabbed widget.
*
* This means that interaction with other widgets in the same
* application is blocked and mouse as well as keyboard events
* are delivered to this widget.
*
* If `widget` is not sensitive, it is not set as the current
* grabbed widget and this function does nothing.
*/
grab_add(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to become the default widget. `widget` must be able to be
* a default widget; typically you would ensure this yourself
* by calling gtk_widget_set_can_default() with a %TRUE value.
* The default widget is activated when
* the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
* activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them. Note
* that #GtkEntry widgets require the “activates-default” property
* set to %TRUE before they activate the default widget when Enter
* is pressed and the #GtkEntry is focused.
*/
grab_default(): void;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Removes the grab from the given widget.
*
* You have to pair calls to gtk_grab_add() and gtk_grab_remove().
*
* If `widget` does not have the grab, this function does nothing.
*/
grab_remove(): void;
/**
* Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
* is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
*
* See also gtk_grab_add().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
*/
has_grab(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
* @returns %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
*/
has_rc_style(): boolean;
/**
* Checks whether there is a #GdkScreen is associated with
* this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
* screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
* window at the top.
* @returns %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associated with the widget.
*/
has_screen(): boolean;
/**
* Determines if the widget should show a visible indication that
* it has the global input focus. This is a convenience function for
* use in ::draw handlers that takes into account whether focus
* indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of
* `widget`. See gtk_window_get_focus_visible() for more information
* about focus indication.
*
* To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
* gtk_widget_has_focus().
* @returns %TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
*/
has_visible_focus(): boolean;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
hide(): void;
/**
* Utility function; intended to be connected to the #GtkWidget::delete-event
* signal on a #GtkWindow. The function calls gtk_widget_hide() on its
* argument, then returns %TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the
* result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
* window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
* the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
* is received.
* @returns %TRUE
*/
hide_on_delete(): boolean;
/**
* Returns whether the widget is currently being destroyed.
* This information can sometimes be used to avoid doing
* unnecessary work.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is being destroyed
*/
in_destruction(): boolean;
/**
* Creates and initializes child widgets defined in templates. This
* function must be called in the instance initializer for any
* class which assigned itself a template using gtk_widget_class_set_template()
*
* It is important to call this function in the instance initializer
* of a #GtkWidget subclass and not in #GObject.constructed() or
* #GObject.constructor() for two reasons.
*
* One reason is that generally derived widgets will assume that parent
* class composite widgets have been created in their instance
* initializers.
*
* Another reason is that when calling g_object_new() on a widget with
* composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets
* before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to g_object_new()
* should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML.
*/
init_template(): void;
/**
* Sets an input shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
* gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region() for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
input_shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Inserts `group` into `widget`. Children of `widget` that implement
* #GtkActionable can then be associated with actions in `group` by
* setting their “action-name” to
* `prefix`.`action-name`.
*
* If `group` is %NULL, a previously inserted group for `name` is removed
* from `widget`.
* @param name the prefix for actions in @group
* @param group a #GActionGroup, or %NULL
*/
insert_action_group(name: string, group?: Gio.ActionGroup | null): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `area,` storing
* the intersection in `intersection,` and returns %TRUE if there was
* an intersection. `intersection` may be %NULL if you’re only
* interested in whether there was an intersection.
* @param area a rectangle
* @returns %TRUE if there was an intersection
*/
intersect(area: Gdk.Rectangle): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle | null];
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is somewhere inside `ancestor,` possibly with
* intermediate containers.
* @param ancestor another #GtkWidget
* @returns %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child, grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
*/
is_ancestor(ancestor: Gtk.Widget): boolean;
/**
* Whether `widget` can rely on having its alpha channel
* drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
* compositing manager is running for `widget’`s screen.
*
* Please note that the semantics of this call will change
* in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
* window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
* @returns %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha channel being drawn correctly.
*/
is_composited(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
* to if it is mapped and visible.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_drawable(): boolean;
/**
* Returns the widget’s effective sensitivity, which means
* it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive
* @returns %TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive
*/
is_sensitive(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether `widget` is a toplevel widget.
*
* Currently only #GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible (and out-of-process
* #GtkPlugs) are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent
* widget.
* @returns %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
*/
is_toplevel(): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether the widget and all its parents are marked as
* visible.
*
* This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
*
* See also gtk_widget_get_visible() and gtk_widget_set_visible()
* @returns %TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible
*/
is_visible(): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
* @returns %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
*/
keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType | null): boolean;
/**
* Lists the closures used by `widget` for accelerator group connections
* with gtk_accel_group_connect_by_path() or gtk_accel_group_connect().
* The closures can be used to monitor accelerator changes on `widget,`
* by connecting to the `GtkAccelGroup:`:accel-changed signal of the
* #GtkAccelGroup of a closure which can be found out with
* gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure().
* @returns a newly allocated #GList of closures
*/
list_accel_closures(): GObject.Closure[];
/**
* Retrieves a %NULL-terminated array of strings containing the prefixes of
* #GActionGroup's available to `widget`.
* @returns a %NULL-terminated array of strings.
*/
list_action_prefixes(): string[];
/**
* Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
* which this widget is the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
* gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()).
*
* The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
* want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
* callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
* must call `g_list_foreach (result,
* (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and then unref all the
* widgets afterwards.
* @returns the list of mnemonic labels; free this list with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
*/
list_mnemonic_labels(): Gtk.Widget[];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
map(): void;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
* @returns %TRUE if the signal has been handled
*/
mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Sets the base color for a widget in a particular state.
* All other style values are left untouched. The base color
* is the background color used along with the text color
* (see gtk_widget_modify_text()) for widgets such as #GtkEntry
* and #GtkTextView. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > base color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the base color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the base color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_base().
*/
modify_base(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW
* > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
* > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
* > #GtkLabel.
* >
* > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
* > background color on their parent; if you want to set the background
* > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
* > a #GtkEventBox widget and setting the background color on that.
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_bg().
*/
modify_bg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the #GtkWidget
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param primary the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
* @param secondary the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
*/
modify_cursor(primary?: Gdk.Color | null, secondary?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the foreground color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the foreground color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_fg().
*/
modify_fg(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_font()
*/
modify_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Modifies style values on the widget.
*
* Modifications made using this technique take precedence over
* style values set via an RC file, however, they will be overridden
* if a style is explicitly set on the widget using gtk_widget_set_style().
* The #GtkRcStyle-struct is designed so each field can either be
* set or unset, so it is possible, using this function, to modify some
* style values and leave the others unchanged.
*
* Note that modifications made with this function are not cumulative
* with previous calls to gtk_widget_modify_style() or with such
* functions as gtk_widget_modify_fg(). If you wish to retain
* previous values, you must first call gtk_widget_get_modifier_style(),
* make your modifications to the returned style, then call
* gtk_widget_modify_style() with that style. On the other hand,
* if you first call gtk_widget_modify_style(), subsequent calls
* to such functions gtk_widget_modify_fg() will have a cumulative
* effect with the initial modifications.
* @param style the #GtkRcStyle-struct holding the style modifications
*/
modify_style(style: Gtk.RcStyle): void;
/**
* Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* The text color is the foreground color used along with the
* base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base()) for widgets such
* as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
* @param state the state for which to set the text color
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_modify_text().
*/
modify_text(state: Gtk.StateType | null, color?: Gdk.Color | null): void;
/**
* Sets the background color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param state the state for which to set the background color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_background_color()
*/
override_background_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the color to use for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
*
* This function does not act recursively. Setting the color of a
* container does not affect its children. Note that some widgets that
* you may not think of as containers, for instance #GtkButtons,
* are actually containers.
*
* This API is mostly meant as a quick way for applications to
* change a widget appearance. If you are developing a widgets
* library and intend this change to be themeable, it is better
* done by setting meaningful CSS classes in your
* widget/container implementation through gtk_style_context_add_class().
*
* This way, your widget library can install a #GtkCssProvider
* with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK priority in order
* to provide a default styling for those widgets that need so, and
* this theming may fully overridden by the user’s theme.
*
* Note that for complex widgets this may bring in undesired
* results (such as uniform background color everywhere), in
* these cases it is better to fully style such widgets through a
* #GtkCssProvider with the %GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION
* priority.
* @param state the state for which to set the color
* @param color the color to assign, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_color()
*/
override_color(state: Gtk.StateFlags | null, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
* cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
* style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
* See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
*
* Note that the underlying properties have the #GdkColor type,
* so the alpha value in `primary` and `secondary` will be ignored.
* @param cursor the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
* @param secondary_cursor the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of gtk_widget_override_cursor().
*/
override_cursor(cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null, secondary_cursor?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are
* left untouched. See gtk_widget_override_color().
* @param font_desc the font description to use, or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_font()
*/
override_font(font_desc?: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;
/**
* Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
*
* All other style values are left untouched.
* See gtk_widget_override_color() for overriding the foreground
* or background color.
* @param name the name of the symbolic color to modify
* @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to gtk_widget_override_symbolic_color()
*/
override_symbolic_color(name: string, color?: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;
/**
* Obtains the full path to `widget`. The path is simply the name of a
* widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by
* periods. The name of a widget comes from
* gtk_widget_get_name(). Paths are used to apply styles to a widget
* in gtkrc configuration files. Widget names are the type of the
* widget by default (e.g. “GtkButton”) or can be set to an
* application-specific value with gtk_widget_set_name(). By setting
* the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
* styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
* file. `path_reversed_p` fills in the path in reverse order,
* i.e. starting with `widget’`s name instead of starting with the name
* of `widget’`s outermost ancestor.
*/
path(): [number, string, string];
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
*
* Flags the widget for a rerun of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* function. Use this function instead of gtk_widget_queue_resize()
* when the `widget'`s size request didn't change but it wants to
* reposition its contents.
*
* An example user of this function is gtk_widget_set_halign().
*/
queue_allocate(): void;
/**
* Mark `widget` as needing to recompute its expand flags. Call
* this function when setting legacy expand child properties
* on the child of a container.
*
* See gtk_widget_compute_expand().
*/
queue_compute_expand(): void;
/**
* Equivalent to calling gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() for the
* entire area of a widget.
*/
queue_draw(): void;
/**
* Convenience function that calls gtk_widget_queue_draw_region() on
* the region created from the given coordinates.
*
* The region here is specified in widget coordinates.
* Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
* defined as `widget->`window coordinates for widgets that return %TRUE for
* gtk_widget_get_has_window(), and are relative to `widget->`allocation.x,
* `widget->`allocation.y otherwise.
*
* `width` or `height` may be 0, in this case this function does
* nothing. Negative values for `width` and `height` are not allowed.
* @param x x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param y y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
* @param width width of region to draw
* @param height height of region to draw
*/
queue_draw_area(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
* be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
* For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
* queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.
*
* Note that you cannot call gtk_widget_queue_resize() on a widget
* from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
* virtual method. Calls to gtk_widget_queue_resize() from inside
* GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate will be silently ignored.
*/
queue_resize(): void;
/**
* This function works like gtk_widget_queue_resize(),
* except that the widget is not invalidated.
*/
queue_resize_no_redraw(): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
realize(): void;
/**
* Computes the intersection of a `widget’`s area and `region,` returning
* the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
* check.
* @param region a #cairo_region_t, in the same coordinate system as @widget->allocation. That is, relative to @widget->window for widgets which return %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window(); relative to the parent window of @widget->window otherwise.
* @returns A newly allocated region holding the intersection of @widget and @region.
*/
region_intersect(region: cairo.Region): cairo.Region;
/**
* Registers a #GdkWindow with the widget and sets it up so that
* the widget receives events for it. Call gtk_widget_unregister_window()
* when destroying the window.
*
* Before 3.8 you needed to call gdk_window_set_user_data() directly to set
* this up. This is now deprecated and you should use gtk_widget_register_window()
* instead. Old code will keep working as is, although some new features like
* transparency might not work perfectly.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
register_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Removes an accelerator from `widget,` previously installed with
* gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
* @param accel_group accel group for this widget
* @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
* @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
* @returns whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
*/
remove_accelerator(
accel_group: Gtk.AccelGroup,
accel_key: number,
accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType | null,
): boolean;
/**
* Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for
* this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). The widget
* must have previously been added to the list with
* gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
* @param label a #GtkWidget that was previously set as a mnemonic label for @widget with gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label().
*/
remove_mnemonic_label(label: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Removes a tick callback previously registered with
* gtk_widget_add_tick_callback().
* @param id an id returned by gtk_widget_add_tick_callback()
*/
remove_tick_callback(id: number): void;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme settings for `widget`
* to look up `stock_id` and render it to a pixbuf. `stock_id` should
* be a stock icon ID such as #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size`
* should be a size such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. `detail` should be a
* string that identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so
* that theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or
* code.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be
* freed after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @param detail render detail to pass to theme engine
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon(stock_id: string, size: number, detail?: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* A convenience function that uses the theme engine and style
* settings for `widget` to look up `stock_id` and render it to
* a pixbuf. `stock_id` should be a stock icon ID such as
* #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size` should be a size
* such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU.
*
* The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
* the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
* after use with g_object_unref().
* @param stock_id a stock ID
* @param size a stock size (#GtkIconSize). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
* @returns a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn’t known
*/
render_icon_pixbuf(stock_id: string, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
/**
* Moves a widget from one #GtkContainer to another, handling reference
* count issues to avoid destroying the widget.
* @param new_parent a #GtkContainer to move the widget into
*/
reparent(new_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Reset the styles of `widget` and all descendents, so when
* they are looked up again, they get the correct values
* for the currently loaded RC file settings.
*
* This function is not useful for applications.
*/
reset_rc_styles(): void;
/**
* Updates the style context of `widget` and all descendants
* by updating its widget path. #GtkContainers may want
* to use this on a child when reordering it in a way that a different
* style might apply to it. See also gtk_container_get_path_for_child().
*/
reset_style(): void;
/**
* Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* an expose event on a widget. This function is not normally used
* directly. The only time it is used is when propagating an expose
* event to a windowless child widget (gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE),
* and that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_draw().
*
* If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
* To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
* with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
* @param event a expose #GdkEvent
* @returns return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if the event was handled)
*/
send_expose(event: Gdk.Event): number;
/**
* Sends the focus change `event` to `widget`
*
* This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
* should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
* to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
* it’s not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
* window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
*
* An example of its usage is:
*
*
* ```c
* GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
*
* fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
* fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
* fevent->focus_change.window = _gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
* if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
* g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
*
* gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
*
* gdk_event_free (event);
* ```
*
* @param event a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
* @returns the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
*/
send_focus_change(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
/**
* Given an accelerator group, `accel_group,` and an accelerator path,
* `accel_path,` sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
* key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
* will be activated. This removes any accelerators (for any
* accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
* gtk_widget_set_accel_path(). Associating accelerators with
* paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
* to be saved for future use. (See gtk_accel_map_save().)
*
* This function is a low level function that would most likely
* be used by a menu creation system like #GtkUIManager. If you
* use #GtkUIManager, setting up accelerator paths will be done
* automatically.
*
* Even when you you aren’t using #GtkUIManager, if you only want to
* set up accelerators on menu items gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()
* provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
*
* Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
* pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
* g_intern_static_string().
* @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
* @param accel_group a #GtkAccelGroup.
*/
set_accel_path(accel_path?: string | null, accel_group?: Gtk.AccelGroup | null): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s allocation. This should not be used
* directly, but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
*
* The allocation set should be the “adjusted” or actual
* allocation. If you’re implementing a #GtkContainer, you want to use
* gtk_widget_size_allocate() instead of gtk_widget_set_allocation().
* The GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_allocation virtual method adjusts the
* allocation inside gtk_widget_size_allocate() to create an adjusted
* allocation.
* @param allocation a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_allocation(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
* an #GtkWidget::draw handler.
*
* This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of
* the GTK+ core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets
* that do pay attention to the flag, such as #GtkEventBox and #GtkWindow,
* the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
* background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application
* is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background.
*
* Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped.
* @param app_paintable %TRUE if the application will paint on the widget
*/
set_app_paintable(app_paintable: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
* gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param can_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_can_default(can_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
* gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
* widget.
* @param can_focus whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
*/
set_can_focus(can_focus: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether `widget` should be mapped along with its when its parent
* is mapped and `widget` has been shown with gtk_widget_show().
*
* The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to
* a container with gtk_widget_set_parent(), to avoid mapping
* children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However
* it will be reset to its default state of %TRUE when the widget
* is removed from a container.
*
* Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not
* queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of
* a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or
* not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container
* can queue a resize itself.
*
* This function is only useful for container implementations and
* never should be called by an application.
* @param is_visible if %TRUE, @widget should be mapped along with its parent.
*/
set_child_visible(is_visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the widget’s clip. This must not be used directly,
* but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
* It must be called after gtk_widget_set_allocation() (or after chaining up
* to the parent class), because that function resets the clip.
*
* The clip set should be the area that `widget` draws on. If `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, the area must contain all children's clips.
*
* If this function is not called by `widget` during a ::size-allocate handler,
* the clip will be set to `widget'`s allocation.
* @param clip a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
*/
set_clip(clip: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be
* a composite child of its parent; see gtk_widget_push_composite_child().
* @param name the name to set
*/
set_composite_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Enables or disables a #GdkDevice to interact with `widget`
* and all its children.
*
* It does so by descending through the #GdkWindow hierarchy
* and enabling the same mask that is has for core events
* (i.e. the one that gdk_window_get_events() returns).
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param enabled whether to enable the device
*/
set_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device, enabled: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive from `device`. Keep
* in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with windowless widgets (which return
* %FALSE from gtk_widget_get_has_window());
* to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
* and receive events on the event box.
* @param device a #GdkDevice
* @param events event mask
*/
set_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask | null): void;
/**
* Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
* controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
* and also the direction in which the children of a container are
* packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
* so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
* reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
* let the default reading direction present, except for containers
* where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly
* visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
*
* If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
* set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
* @param dir the new direction
*/
set_direction(dir: Gtk.TextDirection | null): void;
/**
* Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
* to turn off the buffering. “Double buffered” simply means that
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() are called
* automatically around expose events sent to the
* widget. gdk_window_begin_draw_frame() diverts all drawing to a widget's
* window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_draw_frame() draws the
* buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
* update in one smooth step, and don’t see individual graphics
* primitives being rendered.
*
* In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don’t flicker,
* so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
* if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
*
* Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
* expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
* pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
* gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()).
*
* In 3.10 GTK and GDK have been restructured for translucent drawing. Since
* then expose events for double-buffered widgets are culled into a single
* event to the toplevel GDK window. If you now unset double buffering, you
* will cause a separate rendering pass for every widget. This will likely
* cause rendering problems - in particular related to stacking - and usually
* increases rendering times significantly.
* @param double_buffered %TRUE to double-buffer a widget
*/
set_double_buffered(double_buffered: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
* mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
* that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
* changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
* so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
* unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_events() for widgets that are
* already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
* mask. This function can’t be used with widgets that have no window.
* (See gtk_widget_get_has_window()). To get events on those widgets,
* place them inside a #GtkEventBox and receive events on the event
* box.
* @param events event mask
*/
set_events(events: number): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
* Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
* you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
* application.
* @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
*/
set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the font map to use for Pango rendering. When not set, the widget
* will inherit the font map from its parent.
* @param font_map a #PangoFontMap, or %NULL to unset any previously set font map
*/
set_font_map(font_map?: Pango.FontMap | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #cairo_font_options_t used for Pango rendering in this widget.
* When not set, the default font options for the #GdkScreen will be used.
* @param options a #cairo_font_options_t, or %NULL to unset any previously set default font options.
*/
set_font_options(options?: cairo.FontOptions | null): void;
/**
* Sets the horizontal alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:halign property.
* @param align the horizontal alignment
*/
set_halign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets the has-tooltip property on `widget` to `has_tooltip`. See
* #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
* @param has_tooltip whether or not @widget has a tooltip.
*/
set_has_tooltip(has_tooltip: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
* all realized widgets have a non-%NULL “window” pointer
* (gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
* is realized), but for many of them it’s actually the #GdkWindow of
* one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
* themselves in #GtkWidget::realize must announce this by
* calling this function with `has_window` = %FALSE.
*
* This function should only be called by widget implementations,
* and they should call it in their init() function.
* @param has_window whether or not @widget has a window.
*/
set_has_window(has_window: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
* space. When a user resizes a #GtkWindow, widgets with expand=TRUE
* generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
* scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
* expand.
*
* Call this function to set the expand flag if you would like your
* widget to become larger horizontally when the window has extra
* room.
*
* By default, widgets automatically expand if any of their children
* want to expand. (To see if a widget will automatically expand given
* its current children and state, call gtk_widget_compute_expand(). A
* container can decide how the expandability of children affects the
* expansion of the container by overriding the compute_expand virtual
* method on #GtkWidget.).
*
* Setting hexpand explicitly with this function will override the
* automatic expand behavior.
*
* This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand,
* regardless of children. The override occurs because
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() sets the hexpand-set property (see
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()) which causes the widget’s hexpand
* value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_hexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the hexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_hexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* The hexpand-set property will be set automatically when you call
* gtk_widget_set_hexpand() to set hexpand, so the most likely
* reason to use this function would be to unset an explicit expand
* flag.
*
* If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
* expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
* set, then the expand value depends on whether any
* children of the widget would like to expand.
*
* There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
* for completeness and consistency.
* @param set value for hexpand-set property
*/
set_hexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being mapped.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “map” or “unmap” implementation.
* @param mapped %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
*/
set_mapped(mapped: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the bottom margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-bottom property.
* @param margin the bottom margin
*/
set_margin_bottom(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the end margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-end property.
* @param margin the end margin
*/
set_margin_end(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the left margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-left property.
* @param margin the left margin
*/
set_margin_left(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the right margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-right property.
* @param margin the right margin
*/
set_margin_right(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the start margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-start property.
* @param margin the start margin
*/
set_margin_start(margin: number): void;
/**
* Sets the top margin of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:margin-top property.
* @param margin the top margin
*/
set_margin_top(margin: number): void;
/**
* Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a
* CSS file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name
* in the CSS file. See the documentation for the CSS syntax (on the
* same page as the docs for #GtkStyleContext).
*
* Note that the CSS syntax has certain special characters to delimit
* and represent elements in a selector (period, #, >, *...), so using
* these will make your widget impossible to match by name. Any combination
* of alphanumeric symbols, dashes and underscores will suffice.
* @param name name for the widget
*/
set_name(name: string): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property, which determines whether
* calls to gtk_widget_show_all() will affect this widget.
*
* This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
* controlled visibility, see #GtkUIManager.
* @param no_show_all the new value for the “no-show-all” property
*/
set_no_show_all(no_show_all: boolean): void;
/**
* Request the `widget` to be rendered partially transparent,
* with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Opacity values
* are clamped to the [0,1] range.).
* This works on both toplevel widget, and child widgets, although there
* are some limitations:
*
* For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
* system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
* running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
* always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
* shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
*
* For child widgets it doesn’t work if any affected widget has a native window, or
* disables double buffering.
* @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
*/
set_opacity(opacity: number): void;
/**
* This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
* #GtkContainer.
* Sets the container as the parent of `widget,` and takes care of
* some details such as updating the state and style of the child
* to reflect its new location. The opposite function is
* gtk_widget_unparent().
* @param parent parent container
*/
set_parent(parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Sets a non default parent window for `widget`.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, setting a `parent_window` effects whether
* the window is a toplevel window or can be embedded into other
* widgets.
*
* For #GtkWindow classes, this needs to be called before the
* window is realized.
* @param parent_window the new parent window.
*/
set_parent_window(parent_window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Marks the widget as being realized. This function must only be
* called after all #GdkWindows for the `widget` have been created
* and registered.
*
* This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
* “realize” or “unrealize” implementation.
* @param realized %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
*/
set_realized(realized: boolean): void;
/**
* Specifies whether `widget` will be treated as the default widget
* within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
* is the default.
*
* See gtk_widget_grab_default() for details about the meaning of
* “default”.
* @param receives_default whether or not @widget can be a default widget.
*/
set_receives_default(receives_default: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
* allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
* the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
* leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
* setting off will improve performance.
*
* Note that for widgets where gtk_widget_get_has_window() is %FALSE
* setting this flag to %FALSE turns off all allocation on resizing:
* the widget will not even redraw if its position changes; this is to
* allow containers that don’t draw anything to avoid excess
* invalidations. If you set this flag on a widget with no window that
* does draw on `widget->`window, you are
* responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation of the
* widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
* regions newly when the widget increases size.
* @param redraw_on_allocate if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
*/
set_redraw_on_allocate(redraw_on_allocate: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
* can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are “grayed out” and the
* user can’t interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
* “inactive”, “disabled”, or “ghosted” in some other toolkits.
* @param sensitive %TRUE to make the widget sensitive
*/
set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget’s size
* request will be at least `width` by `height`. You can use this
* function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.
*
* In most cases, gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for
* toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will
* still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request
* will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size
* request. When dealing with window sizes,
* gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful function as well.
*
* Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
* translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
* can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
* basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
* correct.
*
* The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can
* accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly.
* However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than
* its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more
* space than it requested.
*
* If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then
* the “natural” size request of the widget will be used instead.
*
* The size request set here does not include any margin from the
* #GtkWidget properties margin-left, margin-right, margin-top, and
* margin-bottom, but it does include pretty much all other padding
* or border properties set by any subclass of #GtkWidget.
* @param width width @widget should request, or -1 to unset
* @param height height @widget should request, or -1 to unset
*/
set_size_request(width: number, height: number): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
* of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
* the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
* @param state new state for @widget
*/
set_state(state: Gtk.StateType | null): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns on flag
* values in the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
*
* This function accepts the values %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_LTR and
* %GTK_STATE_FLAG_DIR_RTL but ignores them. If you want to set the widget's
* direction, use gtk_widget_set_direction().
*
* It is worth mentioning that any other state than %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE,
* will be propagated down to all non-internal children if `widget` is a
* #GtkContainer, while %GTK_STATE_FLAG_INSENSITIVE itself will be propagated
* down to all #GtkContainer children by different means than turning on the
* state flag down the hierarchy, both gtk_widget_get_state_flags() and
* gtk_widget_is_sensitive() will make use of these.
* @param flags State flags to turn on
* @param clear Whether to clear state before turning on @flags
*/
set_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null, clear: boolean): void;
/**
* Used to set the #GtkStyle for a widget (`widget->`style). Since
* GTK 3, this function does nothing, the passed in style is ignored.
* @param style a #GtkStyle, or %NULL to remove the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
*/
set_style(style?: Gtk.Style | null): void;
/**
* Enables or disables multiple pointer awareness. If this setting is %TRUE,
* `widget` will start receiving multiple, per device enter/leave events. Note
* that if custom #GdkWindows are created in #GtkWidget::realize,
* gdk_window_set_support_multidevice() will have to be called manually on them.
* @param support_multidevice %TRUE to support input from multiple devices.
*/
set_support_multidevice(support_multidevice: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
* the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
*
* This function will take care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE
* and of the default handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-markup property and
* gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
* @param markup the contents of the tooltip for @widget, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_markup(markup?: string | null): void;
/**
* Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
* care of setting #GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE and of the default
* handler for the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
*
* See also the #GtkWidget:tooltip-text property and gtk_tooltip_set_text().
* @param text the contents of the tooltip for @widget
*/
set_tooltip_text(text?: string | null): void;
/**
* Replaces the default window used for displaying
* tooltips with `custom_window`. GTK+ will take care of showing and
* hiding `custom_window` at the right moment, to behave likewise as
* the default tooltip window. If `custom_window` is %NULL, the default
* tooltip window will be used.
* @param custom_window a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
*/
set_tooltip_window(custom_window?: Gtk.Window | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical alignment of `widget`.
* See the #GtkWidget:valign property.
* @param align the vertical alignment
*/
set_valign(align: Gtk.Align | null): void;
/**
* Sets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
* space.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand() for more detail.
* @param expand whether to expand
*/
set_vexpand(expand: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets whether the vexpand flag (see gtk_widget_get_vexpand()) will
* be used.
*
* See gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set() for more detail.
* @param set value for vexpand-set property
*/
set_vexpand_set(set: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visibility state of `widget`. Note that setting this to
* %TRUE doesn’t mean the widget is actually viewable, see
* gtk_widget_get_visible().
*
* This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
* but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
* some condition.
* @param visible whether the widget should be shown or not
*/
set_visible(visible: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the visual that should be used for by widget and its children for
* creating #GdkWindows. The visual must be on the same #GdkScreen as
* returned by gtk_widget_get_screen(), so handling the
* #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal is necessary.
*
* Setting a new `visual` will not cause `widget` to recreate its windows,
* so you should call this function before `widget` is realized.
* @param visual visual to be used or %NULL to unset a previous one
*/
set_visual(visual?: Gdk.Visual | null): void;
/**
* Sets a widget’s window. This function should only be used in a
* widget’s #GtkWidget::realize implementation. The %window passed is
* usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
* window of its parent widget as returned by
* gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
*
* Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
* by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
* widget’s init() function.
*
* Note that this function does not add any reference to `window`.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
set_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* Sets a shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
* transparent windows etc., see gdk_window_shape_combine_region()
* for more information.
* @param region shape to be added, or %NULL to remove an existing shape
*/
shape_combine_region(region?: cairo.Region | null): void;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
show_all(): void;
/**
* Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget
* (i.e. a #GtkWindow that has not yet been shown), enter the main
* loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful;
* because the main loop is running, anything can happen during
* this function.
*/
show_now(): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size,
* position and (optionally) baseline to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation and baseline may be adjusted. It
* will be forced to a 1x1 minimum size, and the
* adjust_size_allocation virtual and adjust_baseline_allocation
* methods on the child will be used to adjust the allocation and
* baseline. Standard adjustments include removing the widget's
* margins, and applying the widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and
* #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* If the child widget does not have a valign of %GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE the
* baseline argument is ignored and -1 is used instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
* @param baseline The baseline of the child, or -1
*/
size_allocate_with_baseline(allocation: Gtk.Allocation, baseline: number): void;
/**
* This function is typically used when implementing a #GtkContainer
* subclass. Obtains the preferred size of a widget. The container
* uses this information to arrange its child widgets and decide what
* size allocations to give them with gtk_widget_size_allocate().
*
* You can also call this function from an application, with some
* caveats. Most notably, getting a size request requires the widget
* to be associated with a screen, because font information may be
* needed. Multihead-aware applications should keep this in mind.
*
* Also remember that the size request is not necessarily the size
* a widget will actually be allocated.
*/
size_request(): Gtk.Requisition;
/**
* This function attaches the widget’s #GtkStyle to the widget's
* #GdkWindow. It is a replacement for
*
*
* ```
* widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
* ```
*
*
* and should only ever be called in a derived widget’s “realize”
* implementation which does not chain up to its parent class'
* “realize” implementation, because one of the parent classes
* (finally #GtkWidget) would attach the style itself.
*/
style_attach(): void;
/**
* Gets the value of a style property of `widget`.
* @param property_name the name of a style property
* @param value location to return the property value
*/
style_get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
* This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on `widget` to be
* emitted.
*/
thaw_child_notify(): void;
/**
* Translate coordinates relative to `src_widget’`s allocation to coordinates
* relative to `dest_widget’`s allocations. In order to perform this
* operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
* toplevel.
* @param dest_widget a #GtkWidget
* @param src_x X position relative to @src_widget
* @param src_y Y position relative to @src_widget
* @returns %FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there was no common ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in *@dest_x and *@dest_y. Otherwise %TRUE.
*/
translate_coordinates(dest_widget: Gtk.Widget, src_x: number, src_y: number): [boolean, number, number];
/**
* Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of `widget`
* is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
* information.
*/
trigger_tooltip_query(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
unmap(): void;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations.
* Should be called by implementations of the remove method
* on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
*/
unparent(): void;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
unrealize(): void;
/**
* Unregisters a #GdkWindow from the widget that was previously set up with
* gtk_widget_register_window(). You need to call this when the window is
* no longer used by the widget, such as when you destroy it.
* @param window a #GdkWindow
*/
unregister_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;
/**
* This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns off flag
* values for the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
* See gtk_widget_set_state_flags().
* @param flags State flags to turn off
*/
unset_state_flags(flags: Gtk.StateFlags | null): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_allocation(baseline: number): void;
vfunc_adjust_baseline_request(minimum_baseline: number, natural_baseline: number): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size allocation assigned
* by a #GtkContainer using gtk_widget_size_allocate(), into an actual
* size allocation to be used by the widget. adjust_size_allocation
* adjusts to a child widget’s actual allocation
* from what a parent container computed for the
* child. The adjusted allocation must be entirely within the original
* allocation. In any custom implementation, chain up to the default
* #GtkWidget implementation of this method, which applies the margin
* and alignment properties of #GtkWidget. Chain up
* before performing your own adjustments so your
* own adjustments remove more allocation after the #GtkWidget base
* class has already removed margin and alignment. The natural size
* passed in should be adjusted in the same way as the allocated size,
* which allows adjustments to perform alignments or other changes
* based on natural size.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
* @param allocated_pos
* @param allocated_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_allocation(
orientation: Gtk.Orientation,
minimum_size: number,
natural_size: number,
allocated_pos: number,
allocated_size: number,
): void;
/**
* Convert an initial size request from a widget's
* #GtkSizeRequestMode virtual method implementations into a size request to
* be used by parent containers in laying out the widget.
* adjust_size_request adjusts from a child widget's
* original request to what a parent container should
* use for layout. The `for_size` argument will be -1 if the request should
* not be for a particular size in the opposing orientation, i.e. if the
* request is not height-for-width or width-for-height. If `for_size` is
* greater than -1, it is the proposed allocation in the opposing
* orientation that we need the request for. Implementations of
* adjust_size_request should chain up to the default implementation,
* which applies #GtkWidget’s margin properties and imposes any values
* from gtk_widget_set_size_request(). Chaining up should be last,
* after your subclass adjusts the request, so
* #GtkWidget can apply constraints and add the margin properly.
* @param orientation
* @param minimum_size
* @param natural_size
*/
vfunc_adjust_size_request(orientation: Gtk.Orientation, minimum_size: number, natural_size: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_press_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a button
* (typically from a mouse) is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_button_release_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;
/**
* Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
* identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
* This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
* signal on `widget;` if the signal isn’t overridden by a
* handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
* that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
* its ancestors mapped.
* @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on @widget
*/
vfunc_can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;
/**
* Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
* [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
* on `widget`.
*
* This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
*
* Also see gtk_container_child_notify().
* @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the class of @widget’s parent
*/
vfunc_child_notify(child_property: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the composited status of
* widgets screen changes. See gdk_screen_is_composited().
*/
vfunc_composited_changed(): void;
/**
* Computes whether a container should give this
* widget extra space when possible.
* @param hexpand_p
* @param vexpand_p
*/
vfunc_compute_expand(hexpand_p: boolean, vexpand_p: boolean): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the size, position or
* stacking of the widget’s window has changed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_configure_event(event: Gdk.EventConfigure): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a redirected window belonging to
* widget gets drawn into.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_damage_event(event: Gdk.EventExpose): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel
* window is closed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_delete_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Destroys a widget.
*
* When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
* will be released:
*
* - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
* parent
* - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
* recursively
* - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
* of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
*
* It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
* be released; you should connect to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal
* if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
* this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
* implementing a #GtkContainer, as you'll be able to use the
* #GtkContainerClass.remove() virtual function for that.
*
* It's important to notice that gtk_widget_destroy() will only cause
* the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
* using g_object_ref(), are held on it. In case additional references
* are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
* this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
* to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
* own state.
*
* You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
* rarely on child widgets.
*
* See also: gtk_container_remove()
*/
vfunc_destroy(): void;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_destroy_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the text direction of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_direction
*/
vfunc_direction_changed(previous_direction: Gtk.TextDirection): void;
/**
* Seldomly overidden.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_child_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* started.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_begin(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag
* with the action %GDK_ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_data_delete(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when the drop
* site requests the data which is dragged.
* @param context
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_get(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the
* dragged data has been received.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param selection_data
* @param info
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_data_received(
context: Gdk.DragContext,
x: number,
y: number,
selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData,
info: number,
time_: number,
): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the user drops the
* data onto the widget.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_drop(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
* finished.
* @param context
*/
vfunc_drag_end(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag has
* failed.
* @param context
* @param result
*/
vfunc_drag_failed(context: Gdk.DragContext, result: Gtk.DragResult): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves
* the widget.
* @param context
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_leave(context: Gdk.DragContext, time_: number): void;
/**
* signal emitted on the drop site when the user moves
* the cursor over the widget during a drag.
* @param context
* @param x
* @param y
* @param time_
*/
vfunc_drag_motion(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
* @param cr
*/
vfunc_draw(cr: cairo.Context): boolean;
/**
* Signal event will be emitted when the pointer
* enters the widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_enter_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
* the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
* be emitted without using this function to do so).
* If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
* instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
* it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
* use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
* window.
* @param event a #GdkEvent
*/
vfunc_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;
vfunc_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_in_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_focus_out_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;
/**
* Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
* assistive technology.
*
* If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
* instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
* implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
* it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
* class for which such an implementation is defined.
*
* The documentation of the
* [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
* library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
*/
vfunc_get_accessible(): Atk.Object;
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
*
* This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
* the specified `width,` or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
* that no baseline is requested for this widget.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
* and by any #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
* the specified `width`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param width the width which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
*
* This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width(): [number, number];
/**
* Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
* the specified `height`.
*
* The returned request will be modified by the
* GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
* #GtkSizeGroups that have been applied. That is, the returned request
* is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
* returned by the widget itself.
* @param height the height which is available for allocation
*/
vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];
/**
* Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
* or a width-for-height layout.
*
* #GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
* their child, container widgets need to request something either in
* context of their children or in context of their allocation
* capabilities.
*/
vfunc_get_request_mode(): Gtk.SizeRequestMode;
/**
* Signal emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab
* on a window belonging to widget gets broken.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_grab_broken_event(event: Gdk.EventGrabBroken): boolean;
/**
* Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
* inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
* something like #GtkFrame won’t work.
*
* More precisely, it must have the %GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use
* gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
*
* The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
* related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
* will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
*/
vfunc_grab_focus(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a
* GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or
* when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed.
* @param was_grabbed
*/
vfunc_grab_notify(was_grabbed: boolean): void;
/**
* Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
* hidden (invisible to the user).
*/
vfunc_hide(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the anchored state of a
* widget changes.
* @param previous_toplevel
*/
vfunc_hierarchy_changed(previous_toplevel: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a key is pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_press_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* Signal is emitted when a key is released.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_key_release_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;
/**
* This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
* a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
* #GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
* value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
* gtk_widget_child_focus():
*
* When %TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
* navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
* focus to.
*
* When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
* navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
* gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget’s toplevel.
*
* The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %FALSE for
* %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
* values of #GtkDirectionType it returns %TRUE.
*
* Whenever the default handler returns %TRUE, it also calls
* gtk_widget_error_bell() to notify the user of the failed keyboard
* navigation.
*
* A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
* (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
* #GtkEntry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
* entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
* that require entering license keys.
* @param direction direction of focus movement
*/
vfunc_keynav_failed(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): boolean;
/**
* Will be emitted when the pointer leaves the
* widget’s window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_leave_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
*/
vfunc_map(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_map_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
* @param group_cycling %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
*/
vfunc_mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the pointer moves over
* the widget’s #GdkWindow.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_motion_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventMotion): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when a change of focus is requested
* @param direction
*/
vfunc_move_focus(direction: Gtk.DirectionType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new parent has been set on a
* widget.
* @param previous_parent
*/
vfunc_parent_set(previous_parent: Gtk.Widget): void;
/**
* Signal emitted whenever a widget should pop up a
* context menu.
*/
vfunc_popup_menu(): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when a property on
* the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_property_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventProperty): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_in_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
vfunc_proximity_out_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when “has-tooltip” is %TRUE and the
* hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above”
* widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.
* @param x
* @param y
* @param keyboard_tooltip
* @param tooltip
*/
vfunc_query_tooltip(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tooltip: boolean, tooltip: Gtk.Tooltip): boolean;
/**
* Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
* gdk_window_invalidate_region() on the widget’s window and all its
* child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
* batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
* receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
* invalidated.
*
* Normally you would only use this function in widget
* implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
* #GtkDrawingArea or some portion thereof.
* @param region region to draw
*/
vfunc_queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;
/**
* Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
* widget. For example, `widget->`window will be created when a widget
* is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
* a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
* realized and mapped automatically.
*
* Realizing a widget requires all
* the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
* gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
* `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
* when you realize it, bad things will happen.
*
* This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
* isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
* need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
* called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
* #GtkWidget::draw. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
* #GtkWidget::realize signal.
*/
vfunc_realize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the screen of a widget has
* changed.
* @param previous_screen
*/
vfunc_screen_changed(previous_screen: Gdk.Screen): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is
* pressed.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_scroll_event(event: Gdk.EventScroll): boolean;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the the
* widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_clear_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_get(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;
vfunc_selection_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
vfunc_selection_received(selection_data: Gtk.SelectionData, time_: number): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when another
* client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's
* window.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_selection_request_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;
/**
* Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
* not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
* container, it’s easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
* container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
*
* Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
* in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
*
* When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
* mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
* toplevel container is realized and mapped.
*/
vfunc_show(): void;
/**
* Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
* a container).
*/
vfunc_show_all(): void;
vfunc_show_help(help_type: Gtk.WidgetHelpType): boolean;
/**
* This function is only used by #GtkContainer subclasses, to assign a size
* and position to their child widgets.
*
* In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
* to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
* method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
* adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
* widget’s #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
*
* For baseline support in containers you need to use gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()
* instead.
* @param allocation position and size to be allocated to @widget
*/
vfunc_size_allocate(allocation: Gtk.Allocation): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state
* changes. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_state
*/
vfunc_state_changed(previous_state: Gtk.StateType): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget state changes,
* see gtk_widget_get_state_flags().
* @param previous_state_flags
*/
vfunc_state_flags_changed(previous_state_flags: Gtk.StateFlags): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a new style has been set on a
* widget. Deprecated: 3.0
* @param previous_style
*/
vfunc_style_set(previous_style: Gtk.Style): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the GtkStyleContext of a widget
* is changed.
*/
vfunc_style_updated(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when a touch event happens
* @param event
*/
vfunc_touch_event(event: Gdk.EventTouch): boolean;
/**
* This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
* a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
*/
vfunc_unmap(): void;
/**
* Signal will be emitted when the widget’s window is
* unmapped.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_unmap_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;
/**
* This function is only useful in widget implementations.
* Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
* associated with the widget, such as `widget->`window).
*/
vfunc_unrealize(): void;
/**
* Signal emitted when the widget’s window is
* obscured or unobscured.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_visibility_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventVisibility): boolean;
/**
* Signal emitted when the state of the toplevel
* window associated to the widget changes.
* @param event
*/
vfunc_window_state_event(event: Gdk.EventWindowState): boolean;
}
namespace KeyRenderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Renderer.ConstructorProps {
object: Gck.Object;
}
}
/**
* An implementation of #GcrRenderer which renders keys.
*/
class KeyRenderer extends GObject.Object implements Renderer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<KeyRenderer>;
// Properties
get object(): Gck.Object;
set object(val: Gck.Object);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<KeyRenderer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](label?: string | null, attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): KeyRenderer;
// Methods
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the renderer.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the renderer. The attributes should represent
* either an RSA, DSA, or EC key in PKCS#11 style.
* @param attrs the attributes to display
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* The attributes to display.
*/
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
/**
* The label to display.
*/
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace KeyWidget {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Bin.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
}
}
/**
* A key widget and renderer
*
* A key widget can be used to display a RSA, DSA or EC key. The widget is
* normally in a collapsed state showing only details, but can be expanded by
* the user.
*
* Use [ctor`KeyWidget`.new] to create a new key widget. Only one key can be
* displayed. A key widget contains a [iface`Viewer]` internally and
* [class`KeyRenderer]` is used to render the key to the viewer. To show more
* than one key in a view, create the viewer and add renderers to it.
*/
class KeyWidget extends Gtk.Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<KeyWidget>;
// Properties
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<KeyWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): KeyWidget;
// Methods
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the widget.
* @returns The attributes, owned by the widget.
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Get the attributes displayed in the widget. The attributes should represent
* either an RSA, DSA or EC key in PKCS#11 style.
* @param attrs the attributes to display
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ListSelector {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.TreeView.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
}
}
/**
* A selector widget to select 1 or more certificates or keys from a list.
*
* Live search is available for quick filtering.
*/
class ListSelector extends Gtk.TreeView implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.Scrollable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListSelector>;
// Properties
/**
* The collection which contains the objects to display in the selector.
*/
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<ListSelector.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](collection: Gcr.Collection): ListSelector;
// Conflicted with Gtk.TreeView.new
static ['new'](...args: never[]): any;
// Methods
/**
* Get the collection that this selector is displaying objects from.
* @returns The collection, owned by the selector.
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get a list of selected objects.
* @returns the list of selected objects, to be released with g_list_free()
*/
get_selected(): GObject.Object[];
/**
* Select certain objects in the selector.
* @param selected the list of objects to select
*/
set_selected(selected: GObject.Object[]): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* Horizontal #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
* shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set hadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Verical #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
* between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set vadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
* @returns %TRUE if @border has been set
*/
get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.
* @returns horizontal #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.
* @returns vertical #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Sets the horizontal adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param hadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_hadjustment(hadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
* below the natural width.
* @param policy the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_hscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param vadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_vadjustment(vadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
* below the natural height.
* @param policy the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_vscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
*/
vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace PromptDialog {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Dialog.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gcr.Prompt.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
choice_visible: boolean;
choiceVisible: boolean;
confirm_visible: boolean;
confirmVisible: boolean;
password_visible: boolean;
passwordVisible: boolean;
warning_visible: boolean;
warningVisible: boolean;
}
}
/**
* A [iface`Gcr`.Prompt] implementation which shows a GTK dialog. The dialog
* will remain visible (but insensitive) between prompts. If the user cancels
* the dialog between prompts, then the dialog will be hidden.
*/
class PromptDialog extends Gtk.Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gcr.Prompt, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<PromptDialog>;
// Properties
/**
* Whether the choice check box is visible or not.
*/
get choice_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the choice check box is visible or not.
*/
get choiceVisible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password confirm entry is visible or not.
*/
get confirm_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password confirm entry is visible or not.
*/
get confirmVisible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password entry is visible or not.
*/
get password_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the password entry is visible or not.
*/
get passwordVisible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the warning label is visible or not.
*/
get warning_visible(): boolean;
/**
* Whether the warning label is visible or not.
*/
get warningVisible(): boolean;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<PromptDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* The string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
*
* In X11, this will be a stringified version of the XWindow handle; in
* Wayland this is the result of an export using the XDG foreign
* protocol.
*/
get caller_window(): string;
set caller_window(val: string);
/**
* The string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
*
* In X11, this will be a stringified version of the XWindow handle; in
* Wayland this is the result of an export using the XDG foreign
* protocol.
*/
get callerWindow(): string;
set callerWindow(val: string);
/**
* The label for the cancel button in the prompt.
*/
get cancel_label(): string;
set cancel_label(val: string);
/**
* The label for the cancel button in the prompt.
*/
get cancelLabel(): string;
set cancelLabel(val: string);
/**
* Whether the additional choice is chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice would have been setup using #GcrPrompt:choice-label.
*/
get choice_chosen(): boolean;
set choice_chosen(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the additional choice is chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice would have been setup using #GcrPrompt:choice-label.
*/
get choiceChosen(): boolean;
set choiceChosen(val: boolean);
/**
* The label for the additional choice.
*
* If this is a non-%NULL value then an additional boolean choice will be
* displayed by the prompt allowing the user to select or deselect it.
*
* If %NULL, then no additional choice is displayed.
*
* The initial value of the choice can be set with #GcrPrompt:choice-chosen.
*/
get choice_label(): string;
set choice_label(val: string);
/**
* The label for the additional choice.
*
* If this is a non-%NULL value then an additional boolean choice will be
* displayed by the prompt allowing the user to select or deselect it.
*
* If %NULL, then no additional choice is displayed.
*
* The initial value of the choice can be set with #GcrPrompt:choice-chosen.
*/
get choiceLabel(): string;
set choiceLabel(val: string);
/**
* The label for the continue button in the prompt.
*/
get continue_label(): string;
set continue_label(val: string);
/**
* The label for the continue button in the prompt.
*/
get continueLabel(): string;
set continueLabel(val: string);
/**
* The detailed description of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display this detailed description.
* The prompt message should contain relevant information.
*/
get description(): string;
set description(val: string);
/**
* The prompt message for the user.
*
* A prompt implementation should always display this message.
*/
get message(): string;
set message(val: string);
/**
* Whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
*/
get password_new(): boolean;
set password_new(val: boolean);
/**
* Whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
*/
get passwordNew(): boolean;
set passwordNew(val: boolean);
/**
* Indication of the password strength.
*
* Prompts will return a zero value if the password is empty, and a value
* greater than zero if the password has any characters.
*
* This is only valid after a successful prompt for a password.
*/
get password_strength(): number;
/**
* Indication of the password strength.
*
* Prompts will return a zero value if the password is empty, and a value
* greater than zero if the password has any characters.
*
* This is only valid after a successful prompt for a password.
*/
get passwordStrength(): number;
/**
* The title of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display the prompt title. The
* #GcrPrompt:message should contain relevant information.
*/
get title(): string;
set title(val: string);
/**
* A prompt warning displayed on the prompt, or %NULL for no warning.
*
* This is a warning like "The password is incorrect." usually displayed to the
* user about a previous 'unsuccessful' prompt.
*/
get warning(): string;
set warning(val: string);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Closes the prompt so that in can no longer be used to prompt. The various
* prompt methods will return results as if the user dismissed the prompt.
*
* The prompt may also be closed by the implementor of the prompt object.
*
* This emits the [signal`Prompt:`:prompt-close] signal on the prompt object.
*/
close(): void;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this function to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the reply from the prompt
*/
confirm(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
*/
confirm_async(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Promise<Gcr.PromptReply>;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
confirm_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): void;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
confirm_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null,
): Promise<Gcr.PromptReply> | void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for confirmation.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
* @returns the reply from the prompt
*/
confirm_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this function to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter
* and will run a main loop similar to a `gtk_dialog_run()`. The application
* will remain responsive but care must be taken to handle reentrancy issues.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the reply from the prompt
*/
confirm_run(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Get the string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the string handle of the window.
*/
get_caller_window(): string;
/**
* Get the label for the cancel button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL reply
* from the prompt.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the label
*/
get_cancel_label(): string;
/**
* Get whether the additional choice was chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice would have been setup using
* gcr_prompt_set_choice_label().
* @returns whether chosen
*/
get_choice_chosen(): boolean;
/**
* Get the label for the additional choice.
*
* This will be %NULL if no additional choice is being displayed.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the additional choice or %NULL
*/
get_choice_label(): string;
/**
* Get the label for the continue button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE reply
* from the prompt.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the label
*/
get_continue_label(): string;
/**
* Get the detailed description of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display this detailed description.
* The prompt message should contain relevant information.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the detailed description of the prompt
*/
get_description(): string;
/**
* Gets the prompt message for the user.
*
* A prompt implementation should always display this message.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the detailed description of the prompt
*/
get_message(): string;
/**
* Get whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
* @returns whether in new password mode or not
*/
get_password_new(): boolean;
/**
* Get indication of the password strength.
*
* Prompts will return a zero value if the password is empty, and a value
* greater than zero if the password has any characters.
*
* This is only valid after a successful prompt for a password.
* @returns zero if the password is empty, greater than zero if not
*/
get_password_strength(): number;
/**
* Gets the title of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display the prompt title. The
* prompt message should contain relevant information.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the prompt title.
*/
get_title(): string;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Window.get_title
get_title(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Get a prompt warning displayed on the prompt.
*
* This is a warning like "The password is incorrect." usually displayed to the
* user about a previous 'unsuccessful' prompt.
*
* If this string is %NULL then no warning is displayed.
* @returns a newly allocated string containing the prompt warning, or %NULL if no warning
*/
get_warning(): string;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the password owned by the prompt, or %NULL
*/
password(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): string;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
*/
password_async(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): Promise<string>;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
password_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): void;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
password_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null,
): Promise<string> | void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for a password.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
* @returns the password owned by the prompt, or %NULL
*/
password_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): string;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will block until the a response is returned from the prompter
* and will run a main loop similar to a gtk_dialog_run(). The application
* will remain responsive but care must be taken to handle reentrancy issues.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @returns the password owned by the prompt, or %NULL
*/
password_run(cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null): string;
/**
* Reset the contents and properties of the prompt.
*/
reset(): void;
/**
* Set the string handle of the caller's window.
*
* The caller window indicates to the prompt which window is prompting the
* user. The prompt may choose to ignore this information or use it in whatever
* way it sees fit.
* @param window_id the window id
*/
set_caller_window(window_id: string): void;
/**
* Set the label for the continue button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL reply
* from the prompt.
* @param cancel_label the label
*/
set_cancel_label(cancel_label: string): void;
/**
* Set whether the additional choice is chosen or not.
*
* The additional choice should be set up using gcr_prompt_set_choice_label().
* @param chosen whether chosen
*/
set_choice_chosen(chosen: boolean): void;
/**
* Set the label for the additional choice.
*
* If this is a non-%NULL value then an additional boolean choice will be
* displayed by the prompt allowing the user to select or deselect it.
*
* The initial value of the choice can be set with the
* gcr_prompt_set_choice_label() method.
*
* If this is %NULL, then no additional choice is being displayed.
* @param choice_label the additional choice or %NULL
*/
set_choice_label(choice_label?: string | null): void;
/**
* Set the label for the continue button.
*
* This is the button that results in a %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE reply
* from the prompt.
* @param continue_label the label
*/
set_continue_label(continue_label: string): void;
/**
* Set the detailed description of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display this detailed description.
* Use gcr_prompt_set_message() to set a general message containing relevant
* information.
* @param description the detailed description
*/
set_description(description: string): void;
/**
* Sets the prompt message for the user.
*
* A prompt implementation should always display this message.
* @param message the prompt message
*/
set_message(message: string): void;
/**
* Set whether the prompt will prompt for a new password.
*
* This will cause the prompt implementation to ask the user to confirm the
* password and/or display other relevant user interface for creating a new
* password.
* @param new_password whether in new password mode or not
*/
set_password_new(new_password: boolean): void;
/**
* Sets the title of the prompt.
*
* A prompt implementation may choose not to display the prompt title. The
* prompt message should contain relevant information.
* @param title the prompt title
*/
set_title(title: string): void;
/**
* Set a prompt warning displayed on the prompt.
*
* This is a warning like "The password is incorrect." usually displayed to the
* user about a previous 'unsuccessful' prompt.
*
* If this string is %NULL then no warning is displayed.
* @param warning the warning or %NULL
*/
set_warning(warning?: string | null): void;
/**
* close a prompt
*/
vfunc_prompt_close(): void;
/**
* Prompts for confirmation asking a cancel/continue style question.
* Set the various properties on the prompt before calling this method to
* represent the question correctly.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
vfunc_prompt_confirm_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null,
): void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for confirmation.
*
* %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CONTINUE will be returned if the user confirms the prompt. The
* return value will also be %GCR_PROMPT_REPLY_CANCEL if the user cancels or if
* an error occurs. Check the `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
*/
vfunc_prompt_confirm_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): Gcr.PromptReply;
/**
* Prompts for password. Set the various properties on the prompt before calling
* this method to explain which password should be entered.
*
* This method will return immediately and complete asynchronously.
* @param cancellable optional cancellation object
* @param callback called when the operation completes
*/
vfunc_prompt_password_async(
cancellable?: Gio.Cancellable | null,
callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null,
): void;
/**
* Complete an operation to prompt for a password.
*
* A password will be returned if the user enters a password successfully.
* The returned password is valid until the next time a method is called
* to display another prompt.
*
* %NULL will be returned if the user cancels or if an error occurs. Check the
* `error` argument to tell the difference.
* @param result asynchronous result passed to callback
*/
vfunc_prompt_password_finish(result: Gio.AsyncResult): string;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace SecureEntryBuffer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends Gtk.EntryBuffer.ConstructorProps {}
}
/**
* A [class`Gtk`.EntryBuffer] that uses non-pageable memory.
*
* It's good practice to try to keep passwords or sensitive secrets out of
* pageable memory whenever possible, so that they don't get written to disk.
*
* A [class`SecureEntryBuffer]` is a [class`Gtk`.EntryBuffer] to be used with
* [class`Gtk`.Entry] which uses non-pageable memory to store a password placed
* in the entry. In order to make any sense at all, the entry must have it's
* visibility turned off, and just be displaying place holder characters for
* the text. That is, a password style entry.
*
* Use [ctor`Gtk`.Entry.new_with_buffer] or [method`Gtk`.Entry.set_buffer] to set this buffer
* on an entry.
*/
class SecureEntryBuffer extends Gtk.EntryBuffer {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<SecureEntryBuffer>;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<SecureEntryBuffer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](): SecureEntryBuffer;
}
namespace TreeSelector {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.TreeView.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
collection: Gcr.Collection;
columns: any;
}
}
/**
* A tree selector can be used to select certificates or keys. It allows
* the user to select multiple objects from a tree.
*/
class TreeSelector extends Gtk.TreeView implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.Scrollable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeSelector>;
// Properties
/**
* The collection which contains the objects to display in the selector.
*/
get collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* The columns to use to display the objects.
*/
get columns(): any;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeSelector.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
// Methods
/**
* Get the collection that this selector is displaying objects from.
* @returns the collection, owned by the selector
*/
get_collection(): Gcr.Collection;
/**
* Get a list of selected objects.
* @returns the list of selected objects, to be released with g_list_free()
*/
get_selected(): GObject.Object[];
/**
* Select certain objects in the selector.
* @param selected the list of objects to select
*/
set_selected(selected: GObject.Object[]): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* Horizontal #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
* shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set hadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
*/
get hscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set hscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Verical #GtkAdjustment of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
* between the scrollable widget and its parent.
*/
get vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
set vadjustment(val: Gtk.Adjustment);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscroll_policy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
/**
* Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
* widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
*/
get vscrollPolicy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
set vscrollPolicy(val: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
* @returns %TRUE if @border has been set
*/
get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.
* @returns horizontal #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_hadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_hscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.
* @returns vertical #GtkAdjustment.
*/
get_vadjustment(): Gtk.Adjustment;
/**
* Gets the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
* @returns The vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
*/
get_vscroll_policy(): Gtk.ScrollablePolicy;
/**
* Sets the horizontal adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param hadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_hadjustment(hadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
* below the natural width.
* @param policy the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_hscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Sets the vertical adjustment of the #GtkScrollable.
* @param vadjustment a #GtkAdjustment
*/
set_vadjustment(vadjustment?: Gtk.Adjustment | null): void;
/**
* Sets the #GtkScrollablePolicy to determine whether
* vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
* below the natural height.
* @param policy the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy
*/
set_vscroll_policy(policy: Gtk.ScrollablePolicy | null): void;
/**
* Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
* outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
* be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
* display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
* at the right position.
*/
vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Gtk.Border];
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace UnlockOptionsWidget {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Bin.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps {
choice: string;
ttl: number;
}
}
/**
* This widget displays a set of unlock options for the user to select.
*
* The user can choose between keeping caching the unlock indefinitely, or for
* a given amount of time.
*
* Each option has a different name, for example #GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS. These
* names are used together with the various functions like
* [method`UnlockOptionsWidget`.get_choice].
*/
class UnlockOptionsWidget extends Gtk.Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<UnlockOptionsWidget>;
// Properties
get choice(): string;
set choice(val: string);
get ttl(): number;
set ttl(val: number);
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<UnlockOptionsWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](): UnlockOptionsWidget;
// Methods
/**
* Get the currently selected option, like %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @returns The currently selected option name.
*/
get_choice(): string;
/**
* Get the label for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
* @returns The current label for the option.
*/
get_label(option: string): string;
/**
* Get the sensitivity state for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
* @returns Whether the option is sensitive or not.
*/
get_sensitive(option: string): boolean;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_sensitive
get_sensitive(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Get the timeout setting set for unlock options that have a timeout.
* This will also return a valid value if the currently selected option
* does not have a timeout.
* @returns The unlock timeout in seconds.
*/
get_ttl(): number;
/**
* Set the currently selected option. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
*/
set_choice(option: string): void;
/**
* Set the label for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS.
* @param option The option name
* @param text The new label
*/
set_label(option: string, text: string): void;
/**
* Set the sensitivity state for one of the options. Use an option name like
* %GCR_UNLOCK_OPTION_ALWAYS. The reason will be displayed as a tooltip.
* @param option The option name
* @param sensitive The sensitivity state.
* @param reason A user displayable string which contains the reason for the sensitivity.
*/
set_sensitive(option: string, sensitive: boolean, reason: string): void;
// Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_sensitive
set_sensitive(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* Set the current setting for the timeout. This can be set even when the
* currently selected option does not have a timeout.
* @param ttl The timeout to set, in seconds
*/
set_ttl(ttl: number): void;
// Inherited methods
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
namespace ViewerWidget {
// Signal callback interfaces
interface Added {
(renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed): void;
}
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps
extends Gtk.Box.ConstructorProps,
Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Buildable.ConstructorProps,
Gtk.Orientable.ConstructorProps {
display_name: string;
displayName: string;
parser: Gcr.Parser;
}
}
/**
* A viewer widget which can display certificates and keys that are
* located in files.
*/
class ViewerWidget extends Gtk.Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gtk.Buildable, Gtk.Orientable {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ViewerWidget>;
// Properties
/**
* Display name for data being displayed. This is automatically
* calculated from a loaded file, or can be explicitly set.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
*/
get display_name(): string;
set display_name(val: string);
/**
* Display name for data being displayed. This is automatically
* calculated from a loaded file, or can be explicitly set.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
*/
get displayName(): string;
set displayName(val: string);
/**
* The parser used to parse loaded data into viewable items.
*/
get parser(): Gcr.Parser;
// Constructors
constructor(properties?: Partial<ViewerWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);
_init(...args: any[]): void;
static ['new'](): ViewerWidget;
// Signals
connect(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
connect_after(id: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;
emit(id: string, ...args: any[]): void;
connect(signal: 'added', callback: (_source: this, renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed) => void): number;
connect_after(
signal: 'added',
callback: (_source: this, renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed) => void,
): number;
emit(signal: 'added', renderer: Renderer, parsed: Gcr.Parsed): void;
// Methods
/**
* Clear the error displayed on the viewer widget.
*/
clear_error(): void;
/**
* Get the display name for data being displayed. This is automatically
* calculated from a loaded file, or can be explicitly set.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
* @returns the display name
*/
get_display_name(): string;
/**
* Get the parser used to parse loaded data into viewable items.
* @returns the parser
*/
get_parser(): Gcr.Parser;
/**
* Get the viewer used to display the viewable items.
* @returns the viewer
*/
get_viewer(): Viewer;
/**
* Parse and load some data to be displayed into the viewer widgets. The data
* may contain multiple parseable items if the format can contain multiple
* items.
* @param display_name label for the loaded data
* @param data data to load
*/
load_bytes(display_name: string | null, data: GLib.Bytes | Uint8Array): void;
/**
* Parse and load some data to be displayed into the viewer widgets. The data
* may contain multiple parseable items if the format can contain multiple
* items.
*
* This function will copy the data. Use [method`ViewerWidget`.load_bytes] to avoid
* copying the data.
* @param display_name label for the loaded data
* @param data data to load
*/
load_data(display_name: string | null, data: Uint8Array | string): void;
/**
* Display contents of a file in the viewer widget. Multiple files can
* be loaded.
* @param file a file to load
*/
load_file(file: Gio.File): void;
/**
* Set the display name for data being displayed. Once explicitly
* set it will no longer be calculated automatically by loading data.
*
* Used as a hint when displaying a title for the data, but may be
* overridden by the parsed data.
* @param display_name the display name
*/
set_display_name(display_name: string): void;
/**
* Show an error on the viewer widget. This is displayed on a info bar near
* the edge of the widget.
* @param message descriptive error message
* @param error detailed error
*/
show_error(message: string, error?: GLib.Error | null): void;
// Inherited properties
/**
* The orientation of the orientable.
*/
get orientation(): Gtk.Orientation;
set orientation(val: Gtk.Orientation);
// Inherited methods
/**
* Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
* @returns the orientation of the @orientable.
*/
get_orientation(): Gtk.Orientation;
/**
* Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
* @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
*/
set_orientation(orientation: Gtk.Orientation | null): void;
/**
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target`.
*
* Whenever the `source_property` is changed the `target_property` is
* updated using the same value. For instance:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_bind_property (action, "active", widget, "sensitive", 0);
* ```
*
*
* Will result in the "sensitive" property of the widget #GObject instance to be
* updated with the same value of the "active" property of the action #GObject
* instance.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well.
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. To remove the binding without affecting the
* `source` and the `target` you can just call g_object_unref() on the returned
* #GBinding instance.
*
* Removing the binding by calling g_object_unref() on it must only be done if
* the binding, `source` and `target` are only used from a single thread and it
* is clear that both `source` and `target` outlive the binding. Especially it
* is not safe to rely on this if the binding, `source` or `target` can be
* finalized from different threads. Keep another reference to the binding and
* use g_binding_unbind() instead to be on the safe side.
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
): GObject.Binding;
/**
* Complete version of g_object_bind_property().
*
* Creates a binding between `source_property` on `source` and `target_property`
* on `target,` allowing you to set the transformation functions to be used by
* the binding.
*
* If `flags` contains %G_BINDING_BIDIRECTIONAL then the binding will be mutual:
* if `target_property` on `target` changes then the `source_property` on `source`
* will be updated as well. The `transform_from` function is only used in case
* of bidirectional bindings, otherwise it will be ignored
*
* The binding will automatically be removed when either the `source` or the
* `target` instances are finalized. This will release the reference that is
* being held on the #GBinding instance; if you want to hold on to the
* #GBinding instance, you will need to hold a reference to it.
*
* To remove the binding, call g_binding_unbind().
*
* A #GObject can have multiple bindings.
*
* The same `user_data` parameter will be used for both `transform_to`
* and `transform_from` transformation functions; the `notify` function will
* be called once, when the binding is removed. If you need different data
* for each transformation function, please use
* g_object_bind_property_with_closures() instead.
* @param source_property the property on @source to bind
* @param target the target #GObject
* @param target_property the property on @target to bind
* @param flags flags to pass to #GBinding
* @param transform_to the transformation function from the @source to the @target, or %NULL to use the default
* @param transform_from the transformation function from the @target to the @source, or %NULL to use the default
* @param notify a function to call when disposing the binding, to free resources used by the transformation functions, or %NULL if not required
* @returns the #GBinding instance representing the binding between the two #GObject instances. The binding is released whenever the #GBinding reference count reaches zero.
*/
bind_property_full(
source_property: string,
target: GObject.Object,
target_property: string,
flags: GObject.BindingFlags | null,
transform_to?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
transform_from?: GObject.BindingTransformFunc | null,
notify?: GLib.DestroyNotify | null,
): GObject.Binding;
// Conflicted with GObject.Object.bind_property_full
bind_property_full(...args: never[]): any;
/**
* This function is intended for #GObject implementations to re-enforce
* a [floating][floating-ref] object reference. Doing this is seldom
* required: all #GInitiallyUnowneds are created with a floating reference
* which usually just needs to be sunken by calling g_object_ref_sink().
*/
force_floating(): void;
/**
* Increases the freeze count on `object`. If the freeze count is
* non-zero, the emission of "notify" signals on `object` is
* stopped. The signals are queued until the freeze count is decreased
* to zero. Duplicate notifications are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property modified while the
* object is frozen.
*
* This is necessary for accessors that modify multiple properties to prevent
* premature notification while the object is still being modified.
*/
freeze_notify(): void;
/**
* Gets a named field from the objects table of associations (see g_object_set_data()).
* @param key name of the key for that association
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
get_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* Gets a property of an object.
*
* The value can be:
* - an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT, which will be automatically initialized with the expected type of the property (since GLib 2.60)
* - a GObject.Value initialized with the expected type of the property
* - a GObject.Value initialized with a type to which the expected type of the property can be transformed
*
* In general, a copy is made of the property contents and the caller is responsible for freeing the memory by calling GObject.Value.unset.
*
* Note that GObject.Object.get_property is really intended for language bindings, GObject.Object.get is much more convenient for C programming.
* @param property_name The name of the property to get
* @param value Return location for the property value. Can be an empty GObject.Value initialized by G_VALUE_INIT (auto-initialized with expected type since GLib 2.60), a GObject.Value initialized with the expected property type, or a GObject.Value initialized with a transformable type
*/
get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): any;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
get_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Gets `n_properties` properties for an `object`.
* Obtained properties will be set to `values`. All properties must be valid.
* Warnings will be emitted and undefined behaviour may result if invalid
* properties are passed in.
* @param names the names of each property to get
* @param values the values of each property to get
*/
getv(names: string[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;
/**
* Checks whether `object` has a [floating][floating-ref] reference.
* @returns %TRUE if @object has a floating reference
*/
is_floating(): boolean;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param property_name the name of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify(property_name: string): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property specified by `pspec` on `object`.
*
* This function omits the property name lookup, hence it is faster than
* g_object_notify().
*
* One way to avoid using g_object_notify() from within the
* class that registered the properties, and using g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead, is to store the GParamSpec used with
* g_object_class_install_property() inside a static array, e.g.:
*
*
* ```c
* typedef enum
* {
* PROP_FOO = 1,
* PROP_LAST
* } MyObjectProperty;
*
* static GParamSpec *properties[PROP_LAST];
*
* static void
* my_object_class_init (MyObjectClass *klass)
* {
* properties[PROP_FOO] = g_param_spec_int ("foo", NULL, NULL,
* 0, 100,
* 50,
* G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS);
* g_object_class_install_property (gobject_class,
* PROP_FOO,
* properties[PROP_FOO]);
* }
* ```
*
*
* and then notify a change on the "foo" property with:
*
*
* ```c
* g_object_notify_by_pspec (self, properties[PROP_FOO]);
* ```
*
* @param pspec the #GParamSpec of a property installed on the class of @object.
*/
notify_by_pspec(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Increases the reference count of `object`.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, if `GLIB_VERSION_MAX_ALLOWED` is 2.56 or greater, the type
* of `object` will be propagated to the return type (using the GCC typeof()
* extension), so any casting the caller needs to do on the return type must be
* explicit.
* @returns the same @object
*/
ref(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Increase the reference count of `object,` and possibly remove the
* [floating][floating-ref] reference, if `object` has a floating reference.
*
* In other words, if the object is floating, then this call "assumes
* ownership" of the floating reference, converting it to a normal
* reference by clearing the floating flag while leaving the reference
* count unchanged. If the object is not floating, then this call
* adds a new normal reference increasing the reference count by one.
*
* Since GLib 2.56, the type of `object` will be propagated to the return type
* under the same conditions as for g_object_ref().
* @returns @object
*/
ref_sink(): GObject.Object;
/**
* Releases all references to other objects. This can be used to break
* reference cycles.
*
* This function should only be called from object system implementations.
*/
run_dispose(): void;
/**
* Each object carries around a table of associations from
* strings to pointers. This function lets you set an association.
*
* If the object already had an association with that name,
* the old association will be destroyed.
*
* Internally, the `key` is converted to a #GQuark using g_quark_from_string().
* This means a copy of `key` is kept permanently (even after `object` has been
* finalized) — so it is recommended to only use a small, bounded set of values
* for `key` in your program, to avoid the #GQuark storage growing unbounded.
* @param key name of the key
* @param data data to associate with that key
*/
set_data(key: string, data?: any | null): void;
/**
* Sets a property on an object.
* @param property_name The name of the property to set
* @param value The value to set the property to
*/
set_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;
/**
* Remove a specified datum from the object's data associations,
* without invoking the association's destroy handler.
* @param key name of the key
* @returns the data if found, or %NULL if no such data exists.
*/
steal_data(key: string): any | null;
/**
* This function gets back user data pointers stored via
* g_object_set_qdata() and removes the `data` from object
* without invoking its destroy() function (if any was
* set).
* Usually, calling this function is only required to update
* user data pointers with a destroy notifier, for example:
*
* ```c
* void
* object_add_to_user_list (GObject *object,
* const gchar *new_string)
* {
* // the quark, naming the object data
* GQuark quark_string_list = g_quark_from_static_string ("my-string-list");
* // retrieve the old string list
* GList *list = g_object_steal_qdata (object, quark_string_list);
*
* // prepend new string
* list = g_list_prepend (list, g_strdup (new_string));
* // this changed 'list', so we need to set it again
* g_object_set_qdata_full (object, quark_string_list, list, free_string_list);
* }
* static void
* free_string_list (gpointer data)
* {
* GList *node, *list = data;
*
* for (node = list; node; node = node->next)
* g_free (node->data);
* g_list_free (list);
* }
* ```
*
* Using g_object_get_qdata() in the above example, instead of
* g_object_steal_qdata() would have left the destroy function set,
* and thus the partial string list would have been freed upon
* g_object_set_qdata_full().
* @param quark A #GQuark, naming the user data pointer
* @returns The user data pointer set, or %NULL
*/
steal_qdata(quark: GLib.Quark): any | null;
/**
* Reverts the effect of a previous call to
* g_object_freeze_notify(). The freeze count is decreased on `object`
* and when it reaches zero, queued "notify" signals are emitted.
*
* Duplicate notifications for each property are squashed so that at most one
* #GObject::notify signal is emitted for each property, in the reverse order
* in which they have been queued.
*
* It is an error to call this function when the freeze count is zero.
*/
thaw_notify(): void;
/**
* Decreases the reference count of `object`. When its reference count
* drops to 0, the object is finalized (i.e. its memory is freed).
*
* If the pointer to the #GObject may be reused in future (for example, if it is
* an instance variable of another object), it is recommended to clear the
* pointer to %NULL rather than retain a dangling pointer to a potentially
* invalid #GObject instance. Use g_clear_object() for this.
*/
unref(): void;
/**
* This function essentially limits the life time of the `closure` to
* the life time of the object. That is, when the object is finalized,
* the `closure` is invalidated by calling g_closure_invalidate() on
* it, in order to prevent invocations of the closure with a finalized
* (nonexisting) object. Also, g_object_ref() and g_object_unref() are
* added as marshal guards to the `closure,` to ensure that an extra
* reference count is held on `object` during invocation of the
* `closure`. Usually, this function will be called on closures that
* use this `object` as closure data.
* @param closure #GClosure to watch
*/
watch_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): void;
/**
* the `constructed` function is called by g_object_new() as the
* final step of the object creation process. At the point of the call, all
* construction properties have been set on the object. The purpose of this
* call is to allow for object initialisation steps that can only be performed
* after construction properties have been set. `constructed` implementors
* should chain up to the `constructed` call of their parent class to allow it
* to complete its initialisation.
*/
vfunc_constructed(): void;
/**
* emits property change notification for a bunch
* of properties. Overriding `dispatch_properties_changed` should be rarely
* needed.
* @param n_pspecs
* @param pspecs
*/
vfunc_dispatch_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the `dispose` function is supposed to drop all references to other
* objects, but keep the instance otherwise intact, so that client method
* invocations still work. It may be run multiple times (due to reference
* loops). Before returning, `dispose` should chain up to the `dispose` method
* of the parent class.
*/
vfunc_dispose(): void;
/**
* instance finalization function, should finish the finalization of
* the instance begun in `dispose` and chain up to the `finalize` method of the
* parent class.
*/
vfunc_finalize(): void;
/**
* the generic getter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_get_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Emits a "notify" signal for the property `property_name` on `object`.
*
* When possible, eg. when signaling a property change from within the class
* that registered the property, you should use g_object_notify_by_pspec()
* instead.
*
* Note that emission of the notify signal may be blocked with
* g_object_freeze_notify(). In this case, the signal emissions are queued
* and will be emitted (in reverse order) when g_object_thaw_notify() is
* called.
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_notify(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* the generic setter for all properties of this type. Should be
* overridden for every type with properties. If implementations of
* `set_property` don't emit property change notification explicitly, this will
* be done implicitly by the type system. However, if the notify signal is
* emitted explicitly, the type system will not emit it a second time.
* @param property_id
* @param value
* @param pspec
*/
vfunc_set_property(property_id: number, value: GObject.Value | any, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;
/**
* Disconnects a handler from an instance so it will not be called during any future or currently ongoing emissions of the signal it has been connected to.
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be disconnected
*/
disconnect(id: number): void;
/**
* Sets multiple properties of an object at once. The properties argument should be a dictionary mapping property names to values.
* @param properties Object containing the properties to set
*/
set(properties: { [key: string]: any }): void;
/**
* Blocks a handler of an instance so it will not be called during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be blocked
*/
block_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Unblocks a handler so it will be called again during any signal emissions
* @param id Handler ID of the handler to be unblocked
*/
unblock_signal_handler(id: number): void;
/**
* Stops a signal's emission by the given signal name. This will prevent the default handler and any subsequent signal handlers from being invoked.
* @param detailedName Name of the signal to stop emission of
*/
stop_emission_by_name(detailedName: string): void;
}
type CertificateRendererClass = typeof CertificateRenderer;
abstract class CertificateRendererPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<CertificateRendererPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type CertificateWidgetClass = typeof CertificateWidget;
abstract class CertificateWidgetPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<CertificateWidgetPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type CollectionModelClass = typeof CollectionModel;
abstract class CollectionModelPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<CollectionModelPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ComboSelectorClass = typeof ComboSelector;
abstract class ComboSelectorPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboSelectorPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type FailureRendererClass = typeof FailureRenderer;
abstract class FailureRendererPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<FailureRendererPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ImportButtonClass = typeof ImportButton;
abstract class ImportButtonPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImportButtonPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type KeyRendererClass = typeof KeyRenderer;
abstract class KeyRendererPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<KeyRendererPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type KeyWidgetClass = typeof KeyWidget;
abstract class KeyWidgetPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<KeyWidgetPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ListSelectorClass = typeof ListSelector;
abstract class ListSelectorPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListSelectorPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type PromptDialogClass = typeof PromptDialog;
abstract class PromptDialogPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<PromptDialogPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type RendererIface = typeof Renderer;
type SecureEntryBufferClass = typeof SecureEntryBuffer;
abstract class SecureEntryBufferPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<SecureEntryBufferPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type TreeSelectorClass = typeof TreeSelector;
abstract class TreeSelectorPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeSelectorPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type UnlockOptionsWidgetClass = typeof UnlockOptionsWidget;
abstract class UnlockOptionsWidgetPrivate {
static $gtype: GObject.GType<UnlockOptionsWidgetPrivate>;
// Constructors
_init(...args: any[]): void;
}
type ViewerIface = typeof Viewer;
type ViewerWidgetClass = typeof ViewerWidget;
namespace Renderer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
attributes: Gck.Attributes;
label: string;
}
}
export interface RendererNamespace {
$gtype: GObject.GType<Renderer>;
prototype: Renderer;
/**
* Create and initialize a renderer for the given attributes and label. These
* renderers should have been preregistered via gcr_renderer_register().
* @param label The label for the renderer
* @param attrs The attributes to render
*/
create(label: string | null, attrs: Gck.Attributes): Renderer | null;
/**
* Register a renderer to be created when matching attributes are passed to
* gcr_renderer_create().
* @param renderer_type The renderer class type
* @param attrs The attributes to match
*/
register(renderer_type: GObject.GType, attrs: Gck.Attributes): void;
/**
* Register all the well known renderers for certificates and keys known to the
* Gcr library.
*/
register_well_known(): void;
}
interface Renderer extends GObject.Object {
// Properties
/**
* The attributes to display.
*/
get attributes(): Gck.Attributes;
set attributes(val: Gck.Attributes);
/**
* The label to display.
*/
get label(): string;
set label(val: string);
// Methods
/**
* Emit the #GcrRenderer::data-changed signal on the renderer. This is used by
* renderer implementations.
*/
emit_data_changed(): void;
/**
* Get the PKCS#11 attributes, if any, set for this renderer to display.
* @returns the attributes, owned by the renderer
*/
get_attributes(): Gck.Attributes | null;
/**
* Called by #GcrViewer when about to display a popup menu for the content
* displayed by the renderer. The renderer can add a menu item if desired.
* @param viewer The viewer that is displaying a popup
* @param menu The popup menu being displayed
*/
popuplate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
/**
* Set the PKCS#11 attributes for this renderer to display.
* @param attrs attributes to set
*/
set_attributes(attrs?: Gck.Attributes | null): void;
// Virtual methods
/**
* signal emitted when data being rendered changes
*/
vfunc_data_changed(): void;
/**
* method invoked to populate a popup menu with additional
* renderer options
* @param viewer
* @param menu
*/
vfunc_populate_popup(viewer: Viewer, menu: Gtk.Menu): void;
/**
* Render the contents of the renderer to the given viewer.
* @param viewer The viewer to render to.
*/
vfunc_render_view(viewer: Viewer): void;
}
export const Renderer: RendererNamespace & {
new (): Renderer; // This allows `obj instanceof Renderer`
};
namespace Viewer {
// Constructor properties interface
interface ConstructorProps extends Gtk.Widget.ConstructorProps {}
}
export interface ViewerNamespace {
$gtype: GObject.GType<Viewer>;
prototype: Viewer;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a view
* of multiple renderers.
*/
['new'](): Viewer;
/**
* Get an implementation of #GcrViewer that supports a scrolled view
* of multiple renderers.
*/
new_scrolled(): Viewer;
}
interface Viewer extends Gtk.Widget {
// Methods
/**
* Add a renderer to this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to add
*/
add_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
/**
* Get the number of renderers present in the viewer.
* @returns The number of renderers.
*/
count_renderers(): number;
/**
* Get a pointer to the renderer at the given index. It is an error to request
* an index that is out of bounds.
* @param index_ The index of the renderer to get
* @returns the render, owned by the viewer
*/
get_renderer(index_: number): Renderer;
/**
* Insert a renderer at a specific point in the viewer
* @param renderer the renderer to insert
* @param before the renderer to insert before
*/
insert_renderer(renderer: Renderer, before?: Renderer | null): void;
/**
* Remove a renderer from this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to remove
*/
remove_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
// Virtual methods
/**
* Add a renderer to this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to add
*/
vfunc_add_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
/**
* Get the number of renderers present in the viewer.
*/
vfunc_count_renderers(): number;
/**
* Get a pointer to the renderer at the given index. It is an error to request
* an index that is out of bounds.
* @param index_ The index of the renderer to get
*/
vfunc_get_renderer(index_: number): Renderer;
/**
* Insert a renderer at a specific point in the viewer
* @param renderer the renderer to insert
* @param before the renderer to insert before
*/
vfunc_insert_renderer(renderer: Renderer, before?: Renderer | null): void;
/**
* Remove a renderer from this viewer.
* @param renderer The renderer to remove
*/
vfunc_remove_renderer(renderer: Renderer): void;
}
export const Viewer: ViewerNamespace & {
new (): Viewer; // This allows `obj instanceof Viewer`
};
/**
* Name of the imported GIR library
* `see` https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gjs/-/blob/master/gi/ns.cpp#L188
*/
const __name__: string;
/**
* Version of the imported GIR library
* `see` https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gjs/-/blob/master/gi/ns.cpp#L189
*/
const __version__: string;
}
export default GcrUi;
}
declare module 'gi://GcrUi' {
import GcrUi3 from 'gi://GcrUi?version=3';
export default GcrUi3;
}
// END
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink